Alteon OS 22.0.

2

Command Reference

part number: 315393-J, January 2005

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel http://www.nortelnetworks.com

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Copyright 2005 Nortel Networks, Inc., 4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 315393-J. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc.

Alteon OS, Alteon 2424, Alteon 2424-SSL, Alteon 2224, 2216, 2208, 3408, Alteon 180, Alteon 180e,
Alteon 184, Alteon AD3, Alteon AD4, and ACEswitch are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Check Point® and FireWall-1® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies. Originated in the U.S.A.

2

315393-J, January 2005

Contents
Preface 15 Who Should Use This Book 15 How This Book Is Organized 15 Related Documentation 16 Typographic Conventions 17 How to Get Help 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 Connecting to the Switch 20 Establishing a Console Connection 20 Requirements 20 Procedure 20 Establishing a Telnet Connection 21 Using a BOOTP Server 21 Running Telnet 21 Establishing an SSH Connection 22 Running SSH 22 Accessing the Switch 23 CLI Versus Setup 25 Command Line History and Editing 25 Idle Timeout 25 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 Using the Setup Utility 27 Information Needed For Setup 27 Starting Setup When You Log In 28 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 29 Stopping Setup 29 Restarting Setup 29 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 29
3

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 31 Setup Part 3: VLANs 34 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 35 IP Interfaces 35 Default Gateways 36 IP Routing 37 Setup Part 5: Final Steps 38 Optional Setup for SNMP Support 39 Optional Setup for Telnet Support 39 Setting Passwords 40 Changing the Default Administrator Password 40 Changing the Default User Password 42 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password 44 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 47 The Main Menu 47 Menu Summary 48 Global Commands 49 Command Line History and Editing 51 Command Line Interface Shortcuts 52 Command Stacking 52 Command Abbreviation 52 Tab Completion 52 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 53 Information Menu 53 System Information Menu 55 SNMPv3 System Information Menu 57 SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 58 SNMPv3 View Table Information 59 SNMPv3 Access Table Information 60 SNMPv3 Group Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Community Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 62 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 63 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information 64 SNMPv3 Dump Information 65 General System Information 66

4

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Show Last 30 Syslog Messages 67 Saved Syslog Messages 68 Management Port Information 69 SONMP Information 70 System Capacity Information 71 System Information Dump 74 Layer 2 Information Menu 77 Layer 2 FDB Information 78 Show All FDB Information 79 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 80 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu 80 LACP Aggregator Information 81 LACP Port Information 82 LACP Dump Information 84 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information 85 Trunk Group Information 87 VLAN Information 88 Layer2 Dump Information 89 Layer3 Information Menu 90 IP Routing Information 91 Show All IP Route Information 92 Type Parameters 92 Tag Parameters 93 ARP Information Menu 93 Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP 95 Show All ARP Entry Information 95 ARP Address List Information 96 BGP Information Menu 96 BGP Peer information 97 BGP Summary information 97 Dump BGP Information 98 OSPF Information Menu 98 OSPF General Information 100 OSPF Interface Information 100 OSPF Database Information 101 OSPF Information Route Codes 102 OSPF Dump Information 103 IP Information 104

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

5

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

VRRP Information 105 Layer3 Dump Information 107 Layer 4 Information Menu 110 Session Table Information 112 Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications 113 Session dump information in Alteon OS 115 Global SLB Information Menu 117 Show All Layer 4 Information 118 Link Status Information 119 Port Information 120 Bandwidth Management Information 121 BWM IP User Information Menu 122 BWM Contract Information 124 Security Information 126 Software Enabled Keys 127 Information Dump 127 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 129 Statistics Menu 129 Port Statistics Menu 131 Bridging Statistics 132 Ethernet Statistics 133 Interface Statistics 136 Interface Protocol Statistics 138 Link Statistics 139 RMON Statistics 140 Port Dump Statistics 143 Layer 2 Statistics Menu 144 FDB Statistics 145 LACP Statistics 146 Spanning Tree Group Statistics 147 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 148 OSPF Statistics Menu 150 OSPF Global Statistics 151 IP Statistics 155 Route Statistics 157 ARP statistics 159 VRRP Statistics 159

6

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

DNS Statistics 160 ICMP Statistics 161 Interface Statistics 163 TCP Statistics 165 UDP Statistics 167 Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu 167 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu 170 SP Real Server Statistics 170 SP Filter Statistics 171 SP Maintenance Statistics 172 Global SLB Statistics Menu 174 Real Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Global SLB Site Statistics 176 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics 177 Real Server SLB Statistics 179 Per Service Octet Counters 179 Real Server Group Statistics 180 Virtual Server SLB Statistics 181 Filter SLB Statistics 181 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu 182 Layer7 Redirection Statistics 182 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics 183 Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics 184 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics 186 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu 187 Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics 188 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics 188 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics 189 FTP SLB Statistics Dump 189 RTSP SLB Statistics 190 DNS SLB Statistics 191 WAP SLB Statistics 192 SLB Maintenance Statistics 194 SIP SLB Statistics 196 Clearing the SLB Statistics 196 BWM Statistics Menu 198 BWM Switch Processor Statistics 199

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

7

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu 199 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics 199 BWM Contract Statistics 200 BWM Contract Rate Statistics 201 BWM History Statistics 203 BWM Maintenance Statistics 204 BWM IP Users Statistics 204 Management Processor Statistics 205 MP Packet Statistics 206 TCP Statistics 208 UCB Statistics 208 MP-Specific SFD Statistics 209 CPU Statistics 209 SP Specific Statistics 210 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics 211 CPU Statistics 211 Security Statistics 212 DOS Attack Statistics Menu 213 Types of DOS Attacks 214 IP Access Control List Statistics 214 UDP Blast Statistics 215 UDP Blast Dump Statistics 215 UDP Pattern Match Statistics 216 Rate Limiting Statistics 216 Dump Statistics for Security 217 SNMP Statistics 218 NTP Statistics 222 Port Mirroring Statistics Menu 224 Management Port Statistics 224 Dump Statistics 225 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 227 Configuration Menu 227 Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 228 Viewing Pending Changes 229 Applying Pending Changes 229 Saving the Configuration 229 System Configuration 231

8

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

System Host Log Configuration 233 Seven Levels of Severity 234 Management Port Configuration Menu 234 Management Port Link Menu 237 SSH Server Configuration Menu 237 RADIUS Server Configuration 239 TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu 240 NTP Server Configuration 242 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration 243 System SNMP Configuration 244 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu 247 User Security Model Configuration Menu 249 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu 250 View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu 251 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu 253 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu 254 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu 255 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu 256 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu 257 System Health Check Configuration Menu 258 System Access Control Configuration 259 Management Networks Menu 260 User Access Control Menu 261 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu 263 System User ID Configuration Menu 264 Port Configuration 265 Alteon OS 2000 Series 265 Fast Ethernet Ports 265 SFP GBIC Ports 265 Port Link Configuration 267 Alteon OS 3000 Series 269 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 269 Single-Mode ports 270 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu 271 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu 273 Dual-Mode Ports 274 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration 276 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu 277

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

9

January 2005 .0.2 Command Reference Temporarily Disabling a Port 277 Port Mirroring Menu 278 Port-Mirroring Menu 278 Bandwidth Management Configuration 279 Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration 281 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu 283 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration 284 Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu 285 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration 286 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 287 Spanning Tree Group Configuration 288 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration 290 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 291 Trunk Configuration 292 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu 294 LACP Port Configuration Menu 296 VLAN Configuration 297 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 299 IP Interface Configuration 301 Default IP Gateway Configuration 302 Default Gateway Metrics 303 IP Static Route Configuration 304 ARP Configuration Menu 304 ARP Static Configuration Menu 305 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu 306 Local Network Route Caching Definition 306 Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache 307 Network Filter Configuration 308 Route Map Configuration Menu 309 IP Access List Configuration Menu 311 Autonomous System Filter Path 312 Routing Information Protocol Configuration 313 Open Shortest Path First Configuration 315 Area Index Configuration Menu 317 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu 318 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 319 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 321 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu 322 10 Contents 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

0. 323 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 324 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 324 BGP Peer Configuration Menu 326 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu 328 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu 329 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu 330 Domain Name System Configuration Menu 331 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu 332 VRRP Configuration Menu 333 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 334 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 336 Virtual Router Group Menu 338 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 340 Virtual Router Group Configuration 341 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 343 VRRP Interface Configuration 345 VRRP Tracking Configuration 346 Default Gateway Metrics 347 Security Configuration Menu 348 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu 349 Pattern Matching Menu 350 Port Security Configuration Menu 351 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu 352 Setup 353 Dump 353 Saving the Active Switch Configuration 354 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 354 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 355 SLB Configuration 356 Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) 358 Real Server SLB Configuration 358 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration 362 Real server IDS Configuration Menu 363 Real Server Group SLB Configuration 364 SLB Health Check Types 367 Server Load Balancing Metrics 370 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. January 2005 Contents 11 .

January 2005 .0.2 Command Reference Virtual Server SLB Configuration 372 Virtual Server Service Configuration 375 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration 380 Cookie-Based Persistence 381 SLB Filter Configuration 383 Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters 387 Advanced Filter Configuration 388 802.1p Advanced Menu 391 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration 392 IP Advanced Menu 393 ICMP Message Types 394 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu 395 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu 397 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu 398 Port SLB Configuration 399 Global SLB Configuration 401 GSLB Remote Site Configuration 403 GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu 405 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu 406 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu 408 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu 408 Web Cache Redirection Configuration 409 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu 411 WAP Configuration 412 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration 413 Peer Switch Configuration 414 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration 415 SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu 418 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu 418 Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu 419 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu 420 Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu 421 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu 421 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration 423 SNMP Health Check Configuration 425 WAP Health Check Configuration 426 WSP Content Health Check 428 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu 429 12 Contents 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

439 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options 439 Operations-Level IP Options 440 Operations-Level BGP Options 440 Activating Optional Software 441 Removing Optional Software 442 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 443 Boot Menu 443 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 444 Scheduled Reboot Menu 444 Updating the Switch Software Image 444 Downloading New Software to Your Switch 444 Selecting a Software Image to Run 446 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 446 Selecting a Configuration Block 447 Resetting the Switch 448 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 449 Maintenance Menu 449 System Maintenance Options 451 Forwarding Database Options 451 ARP Cache Options 452 ARP Entries on a Single Port 453 IP Route Manipulation 454 Debugging Options 455 Uuencode Flash Dump 456 TFTP System Dump Put 456 Clearing Dump Information 457 Panic Command 457 315393-J. January 2005 Contents 13 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu 430 SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu 431 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 433 Operations Menu 433 Operations-Level Port Options 435 Operations-Level SLB Options 436 Real Server Group Operations 437 Global SLB Operations Menu 438 Operations-Level VRRP Options.0.

January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Unscheduled System Dumps 458 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 459 LOG_WARNING 459 LOG_ALERT 460 LOG_CRIT 461 LOG_ERR 461 LOG_NOTICE 467 LOG_INFO 469 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 471 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 475 Glossary 477 Index 481 14 Contents 315393-J.0.

global commands. ports. the IEEE 802. “Menu Basics. “The Information Menu.” provides an overview of the menu system. How This Book Is Organized “The Command Line Interface. Port Mirroring. For documentation on installing the switches physically. and more. “The Configuration Menu. SNMP.” shows how to view switch performance statistics. “The Statistics Menu.” shows how to view switch configuration parameters.1d Spanning Tree Protocol. and menu shortcuts. January 2005 15 . Spanning Tree Protocol. VLANs. Who Should Use This Book This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network.0.Preface The Alteon OS 22.” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords. 315393-J. IP Routing. Port Trunking.” shows how to configure switch system parameters. see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model. IP addressing. including a menu map.” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts. “First-Time Configuration. and SNMP configuration parameters.2 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software with your Alteon OS.

how to install it. Alteon OS 22. Related Documentation Alteon OS 22. and how to reset the software to factory defaults.0. Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (315395-C) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch.” shows how to configure Server Load Balancing. Appendix A.2 Command Reference “The SLB Configuration Menu.2 Release Notes (315397-H).” shows a listing of syslog messages. Global Server Load Balancing. This document provides a description of new features and caveats and limitations. but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports).” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images.” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) sup- ported in the switch software. 16 Preface 315393-J. if any.0. Filtering. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book. the physical features. 315394-H) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch. “Alteon OS SNMP Agent.0. “Alteon OS Syslog Messages. “The Maintenance Menu.” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information. The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features. and more. and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database.” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance. Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (315396-E) Provides a description of the Alteon Application Switch hardware.” shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately. “The Boot Options Menu. how to load a new software image. in the software. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book. Appendix B.Alteon OS 22. how to clear it. and how to troubleshoot it. Appendix C. “The Operations Menu.2 Application Guide (Part No. January 2005 . “Performing a Serial Download.

txt file. It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. special terms. enter: examples as a parameter placeholder. or words to be emphasized. Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands.2 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. files.0. and directories used within the text. Do not type the brackets. Example View the readme. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. host# ls [-a] 315393-J. Do not type the brackets. AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands.Alteon OS 22. This also shows book titles. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. January 2005 Preface 17 .

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller.nortelnetworks. Middle East. and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000 North America Asia Pacific China Additional information about the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www. January 2005 .com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel Networks products and services. contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.com/help/contact/erc/index.html 18 Preface 315393-J. refer to the following URL: http://www. If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program. contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers: Technical Solutions Center Europe. To locate an ERC for your product or service.nortelnetworks. your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service. When you use an ERC.

315393-J. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. Using a basic terminal.CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your Alteon Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Element Management System (EMS) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. January 2005 19 . The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: A built-in. you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch. Some of the more advanced features. and to perform any necessary configuration. however. This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) to the switch.

January 2005 .2 Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network Establishing a Console Connection Requirements To establish a console connection with the switch. see “Setting Passwords” on page 40).Alteon OS 22. To establish the connection. Power on the terminal. you will need the following: An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics). Procedure 1. (For more information. 2. You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. 20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-J.0. Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable. 3. press <Enter> a few times on your terminal.

The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address. before you can use these methods of accessing the switch. Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port. followed by the switch IP address: telnet <IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 22.Alteon OS 22. the Alteon OS software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. using serial connection. Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the Alteon Application Switch are configured. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. The switch must have an IP address. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. NOTE – If connecting to the management port. run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command. If you have a BOOTP server on your network. Refer to “Establishing a Telnet Connection” on page 21. from a BOOTP server on your network Manually. you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch. To configure the switch for Telnet access. Using a BOOTP Server By default. The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: Dynamically. January 2005 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21 . 315393-J. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 55). BOOTP is not supported.0. when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 29). NOTE – You need to enable Telnet and SSH. add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch.2 Command Reference Establishing a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Establishing an SSH Connection
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Alteon Application Switch via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection. Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.) F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.

Running SSH
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Alteon Application Switch, you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:
>> # ssh <switch IP address>

22

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>

You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.

Accessing the Switch
To enable better switch management and user accountability, seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Alteon Application Switch. Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows: User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Alteon Application Switch. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Alteon Application Switch. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Alteon Application Switch. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via local console, Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see “Setting Passwords” on page 40.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

23

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. Password user

SLB Operator

The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser- slboper vices and their loads. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics, the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. and the access level is reserved for future use, to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. In addition to oper SLB Operator functions, the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. In addition to SLB Operator functions, the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. In addition to SLB Administrator functions, the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, including filters and bandwidth management. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. slbadmin

Layer 4 Operator

Operator

SLB Administrator

Layer 4 Administrator

l4admin

Administrator

admin

NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users.

24

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

CLI Versus Setup
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration”), a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.
[Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit

-

Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command, always available]

NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account, some menu options will not be available.

Command Line History and Editing
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see “Menu Basics” on page 47.”

Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes. For information on changing this parameter, see “System Configuration” on page 231.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

25

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

26

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 2

First-Time Configuration
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Alteon OS software includes a Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch, you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch.

Using the Setup Utility
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login.

Information Needed For Setup
Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use BOOTP or not Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Management port configuration Optional configuration for each port Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)
27

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address, subnet mask, and broadcast address, and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for up to four default gateways Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not

Starting Setup When You Log In
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. 1. Connect to the switch console. After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.
Enter Password:

2.

Enter admin as the default administrator password. If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:
Connected to Alteon Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Mon April 12, 2004 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:

NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. 3.
28

Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup, the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]

Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.

Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt:
# /cfg/setup

Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time, BOOTP, Spanning Tree, Management port, Port Speed/Mode, VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]

1.

Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs, see the Alteon OS 22.0.2 Application Guide. Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.

2.

Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter year [2004]:

Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To keep the current year, press <Enter>.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

29

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

3.

Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter month [4]:

Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>. 4. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [12]:

Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>. 5. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:

Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>. 6. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:

Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>. 7. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:

Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>. The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Mon April 12, 2004.

8.

Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt:
BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]:

disabled

30

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

315393-J. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on.0. you will be prompted for IP address. some of the prompts and options may be different. When configuring port options for other switches. Select the port to configure. BOOTP must be disabled however. before the system will prompt for IP parameters. and other management port options. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Alteon OS 2424. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 31 . broadcast address. a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP. If desired. To keep the current setting. or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. default gateway. set up the management port: Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y If you answer y to configure the management port. 9.2 Command Reference If available on your network. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. 2. press <Enter>.Alteon OS 22. 1. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28) If you wish to change settings for individual ports. To skip port configuration. subnet mask.

or press <Enter> to keep the current setting.2 Command Reference 3. or none to turn flow control off for the port. 4. half for half-duplex. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode. press <Enter>. If appropriate. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. To keep the current setting. To keep the current setting. press <Enter>. If appropriate. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. press <Enter>. off to disable it. the system prompts: Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]: Enter the port speed from the options available. January 2005 . If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. both to enable both. or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable autonegotiation. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. If appropriate.0. 6. 5. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed. tx for transmit flow control. 32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. the system prompts: Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"] Enter full for full-duplex. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. the system prompts: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control.Alteon OS 22. or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. To keep the current setting. If appropriate.

enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. 10. both to enable both. press <Enter>. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port number: When you are through configuring ports. To keep the current setting. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. To keep the current setting. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33 . or none to turn flow control off for the port. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. off to disable it. repeat the steps in this section. 315393-J. 8.0. If configuring VLANs. If appropriate. 9. Otherwise.Alteon OS 22. tx for transmit flow control. configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. If appropriate. press <Enter>.2 Command Reference 7. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. press <Enter> without specifying any port. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port.

Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered. type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: VLAN is newly created. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. 3. Enter the VLAN port numbers. The right angle prompt appears: > For each additional port in the VLAN. NULL at end: Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>. 4. To use the pending new VLAN name.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1. January 2005 . or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. press <Enter> without specifying any port. NULL at end: 34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. 1.0. To skip VLAN configuration. without quotes: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. press <Enter>. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. 2. Select the VLAN to configure. The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN: Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line.

enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0. Select the IP interface to configure. Otherwise. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. To skip IP interface configuration.0 315393-J.0. If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration. When all VLANs have been configured. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.0.0 To keep the current setting. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. the system prompts for IP parameters. Setup Part 4: IP Configuration If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1.0. At the prompt. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps.Alteon OS 22. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 36. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. 3.0. For the specified IP interface. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network. press <Enter>. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35 . and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). if you disabled BOOTP.0.2 Command Reference Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. 2. 1. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet.

January 2005 . 36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. To skip default gateway configuration. If configuring VLANs. At the prompt. specify a VLAN for the interface. 6. At the prompt. enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0.0. Default Gateways 1. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 7. When all interfaces have been configured. press <Enter>. enter y to enable the IP interface. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. press <Enter>.Alteon OS 22. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 37.2 Command Reference To keep the current setting. 4. select a default gateway for configuration.0. At the prompt. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured.0 To keep the current setting.0. 5.

To disable IP forwarding. At the prompt. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Alteon Application Switch. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically.Alteon OS 22. Routing on more complex networks. enter n and proceed to Step 2. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. 1. This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch.0.2 Command Reference 2. 2.0. enter y to enable the default gateway. enable or disable the RIP supply: Enable RIP supply? [y/n] 315393-J. When all default gateways have been configured. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37 . At the prompt. At the prompt. press <Enter> without specifying any number. press <Enter>.To keep the current setting. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. 3. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting.0. At the prompt. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured.

Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. Changes are normally applied. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 40. We recommend that you review the changes. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. January 2005 . 4. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes. 5. 2.0. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. If you do not apply or save the changes. When prompted. 38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Changes are normally saved at this point. or n to continue without applying.2 Command Reference Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. At the prompt. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete. When prompted. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. or n to continue. 3. Next.

>> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena 2. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. such as Alteon EMS. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39 . NOTE – If you need to configure SNMPv3.2 Command Reference Optional Setup for SNMP Support NOTE – This step is optional. >> System# apply >> System# save Optional Setup for Telnet Support NOTE – This step is optional. Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 39.Alteon OS 22. >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp (disabled/read-only/read-write) [d/r/w]: 2.0. 1. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools. Enable telnet. they are public and private respectively. Enable SNMP and select one of the options. 1. Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s). >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. refer to “SNMPv3 Configuration Menu” on page 247 of this manual. >> System# apply >> System# save 315393-J. By default. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. Set SNMP read or write community string.

call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. you must login using the administrator password. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. follow this procedure: 1. The default password for the administrator account is admin. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg 40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. RIP listen is set by default. From the Main Menu.0.Alteon OS 22. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. To change the default password. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode. and configuration commands. information.2 Command Reference If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP). 2. To change both the user password and the administrator password. Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. enter n to disable it. enter y to enable the RIP supply. Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus. January 2005 . Otherwise. When RIP is enabled.

use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys The System Menu is displayed.Layer 3 Menu slb .System-wide Parameter Menu port . January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 41 . [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur - Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters 315393-J.Port Menu pmirr .Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .Alteon OS 22.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .0.Step by step configuration set up dump .Layer 2 Menu l3 .Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . From the Configuration Menu.Security Menu setup .Restore current configuration from tftp server 3.Port Mirroring Menu bwm . [Configuration Menu] sys .2 Command Reference The Configuration Menu is displayed.

Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch.. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. again.Alteon OS 22. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8.. Through a user account. 7.0.2 Command Reference 4. Enter the new administrator password. validation required. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. as shown in the following procedure. use the following path to select the User menu: System# access/user 5. This password cannot be changed from the user account. January 2005 . 42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. System# user/admpw 6. From the System menu. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. you can view switch information and statistics. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. The default password for the user account is user. but you can’t make configuration changes. Select the administrator password.

use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. Select the user password. validation required. again.. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. 2. Enter the new user password. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 8. From the Configuration Menu. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4.Alteon OS 22.0. Changing USER password. Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 7. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save 315393-J. Enter current administrator password: 6. From the Main Menu.2 Command Reference 1. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority.. Only the administrator can change the user password. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 43 . System# access/user/usrpw 5. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.

Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt: Enter new L4 administrator password: 6. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. From the Main Menu.. use the following path to access the user command: Main# /cfg/sys/access/user 3. Enter the new administrator password. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. 2. Select the Layer 4 administrator password: System# l4apw 4. The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. you must login using the administrator password.. you can view all switch information and statistics. Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt: Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account. again. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. Through a Layer 4 administrator account.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . validation required. 5.0. at the prompt: Re-enter new L4 administrator password: 44 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. follow this procedure: 1. To change any switch password.2 Command Reference Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. To change the default password.

January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 45 .0. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference 7.

January 2005 .2 Command Reference 46 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0.

January 2005 47 . The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. To make the CLI easy to use. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. always available] 315393-J. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. In addition. along with a summary of what each command will do. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The Alteon Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. Some features are not available under the user login. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands.

Alteon OS 22. selecting configuration blocks. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software.0. and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. 48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. UDP. Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. January 2005 . DNS. TCP. Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch.2 Command Reference Menu Summary Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. and more. Layer 4 settings. and Layer 4 statistics. performing port mirroring. VRRP. ICMP. IF. Included are port. and for resetting the switch when necessary. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. SNMP. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. IP. routing. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. ARP.

You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping traceroute telnet pushd popd who The following are used to navigate the menu structure: .2 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. type help.Alteon OS 22. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. The default is 24 lines. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. the current setting is displayed. Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory... Otherwise. When used without the command parameter.0. navigating through menus. Display the current menu. Print current menu . Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command. January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 49 . Go up one level in the menu structure. If placed at the beginning of a command. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. For help on a specific command. or command separator ! Execute command from history pwd quit revert history Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help . Apply pending configuration changes. a summary of the global commands is displayed. Exit from the command line interface and log out. and for applying and saving configuration changes. lines diff apply save revert exit or quit 315393-J. When used without a value. Show any pending configuration changes. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line. or print . or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. go to the Main Menu.

By default. Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. By default. traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history pushd popd who 50 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331). Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. When used without a value. Display the command path used to reach the current menu.2 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32). If the management port is used. This command displays the currently logged user’s session information. This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands. This command takes the user one level back to the menu location stored by the last pushd command. January 2005 . The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. This command stores the current location of the menu tree. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. By default. maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices). but no menus. and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response.0. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. As with ping. specify the -m or -mgmt option. specify the -m or -mgmt option. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries <(1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. If the management port is used. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station. specify the -m or -mgmt option. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. the current setting is displayed. the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is used. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown.

) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position.0. (Also the right arrow key. (Also the Delete key. The recalled command can be entered as is. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. <Ctrl-n> <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. or edited using the options below.) Recall the next command from the history list. Delete one character at the cursor position. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands.) Recall the previous command from the history list. Clear the entire line. Redraw the screen. (Also the left arrow key. The recalled command can be entered as is.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. (Also the down arrow key. January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 51 . Repeat the last entered command. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list.2 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. Insert new characters at the cursor position. or edited using the options below. (Also the up arrow key. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. Move cursor to the end of the command line. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes.

0. the currently active menu will be displayed. you can type multiple commands on a single line. January 2005 . 52 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/st/p Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stg/port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu.2 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed.Alteon OS 22. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. separated by forward slashes (/). waiting to be entered. that command will be supplied on the command line. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line. For example. For example.

Bandwidth Management Information Menu security . /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys . January 2005 53 . 315393-J. Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information. To view menu options.Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 53. see page 55. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor- mation.Show Security status swkey . with pointers to where detailed information can be found. l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu.Show link status port .Layer 4-7 Information Menu link .Layer 3 Information Menu slb . see page 77.Show enabled software features dump . see page 90. For details. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.Show port information bwm .CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes.System Information Menu l2 . For details.Layer 2 Information Menu l3 .

For details see page 127. or auto) Link status (up or down) For details. To view menu options. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. including: Port number Port speed (10. 100. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. If you want to capture dump data to a file. or 1000) Duplex mode (half.0. see page 110. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. yes. full. security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port. January 2005 . depending on your configuration).Alteon OS 22. 54 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. including: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details. bwm Displays Bandwidth Management information. port Displays port status information. 10/100. see page 120. link Displays configuration information about each port. see page 119.2 Command Reference Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. see page 121. For details. To view a sample. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. see page 127. see page 126. For details.

mgmt Displays Management port information. day. See page 67 for a sample output and detailed information. log Displays last 30 syslog messages. See page 69 for detailed information. and date. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 55 . To view the menu options. Management Processor Board Hardware. See page 68 for a sample output. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor Internal SSL Processor MAC Address if the switch is 2424-SSL IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware.Alteon OS 22. general Displays general system information including: System information like time.2 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] snmpv3 general log savedlog mgmt sonmp capacity fan temp dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show last 30 syslog messages Display syslog messages saved in flash Show Management Port information Show SONMP topology table information Show switch capacity information Show switch fan status Show switch temperature sensor status Dump all system information Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner. savedlog Displays syslog messages that are saved in flash.0. if one is configured See page 66 for a sample output. see page 57.

Bandwidth Management. capacity gen|bwm|l2|l3|slb|port Displays the switch capacity information. temp Displays the temperature status of the switch sensors. January 2005 . See page 70 for detailed information. See page 71 for a sample output. RIP. Network Filters. General switch information. Layer 3. Health Checks. and SNMPv3. 56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. Filters. See page 74 for a sample output. dump Displays all system information. OSPF.Alteon OS 22. BGP.2 Command Reference Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. fan Displays the fan status of the switch.0. which includes Server Load Balancing. VRRP. Route Maps. Layer 4-7. GSLB. The output contains capacity information about Layer 2. This output displays the maximum switch capacity for the various applications and services that the switch supports.

comm Displays information about the community table information.Show usmUser table information view . see page 61. To view the table. group Displays information about the group that includes. To view a sample. view Displays information about view.Show targetAddr table information tparam . user name. To view a sample. and group name. [SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm .0. the security model. 315393-J. access Displays View-based Access Control information.Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access .Show notify table information dump .Show all SNMPv3 information Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. To view a sample. To view a sample. mask and type of view. see page 62. see page 58. see page 59. see page 60. see page 61.Show vacmAccess table information group . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57 .Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm . To view a sample.Show community table information taddr .Alteon OS 22.Show targetParams table information notify . taddr Displays the Target Address table information.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. sub tress.

NO PRIVACY 58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. see page 64. which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol. The USM user table contains information like: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol. To view a sample. usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH.2 Command Reference Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage tparam Displays the Target parameters table information.Alteon OS 22. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5. January 2005 . To view a sample. /info/sys/snmpv3/usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. see page 65. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table.0. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. notify Displays the Notify table information. see page 63. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. To view a sample.

View Name ----------------org v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1.3 1.0. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol.3.6.3 1.16 1.6.1.6. Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string.15 1.6.2 supports DES algorithm for privacy. Displays the bit mask.3.0. /info/sys/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.2 Command Reference Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm) Field User Name Protocol Description This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.Alteon OS 22. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.3. Alteon OS 22.1.3.18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view) Field View Name Subtree Description Displays the name of the view. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59 .1. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA. Mask Type 315393-J.3.6.3.6. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.

----------. Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV 60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. authNoPriv. which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view. Displays the security model used. and a message type.Alteon OS 22. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access.---------admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access) Field Group Name Prefix Model Description Displays the name of group.-----. a write-view and a notify-view. Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. noAuthNoPriv.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services. for example. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects.0. Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. or SNMPv2 or USM. For example. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view. security information. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification. SNMPv1. January 2005 . The vacmAccessTable maps a group name. Displays the match for the contextName.-----. or authPriv. Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. a context.------. The options are: exact and prefix.

Displays the name for the group. SNMPv2. Index Name User Name Tag ---------. Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only admin adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp admingrp Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group) Field Sec Model User Name Group Name Description Displays the security model used.---------. The group is identified by a group name. Displays the access name of the group.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. /info/sys/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine. and SNMPv3.---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap 315393-J.-------------------. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61 .Alteon OS 22. SNMPv1. which is any one of: USM.0.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm)
Field Index Name User Name Tag Description Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string, which represents the configuration. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name. Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.

/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the SNMP engine.
Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param

Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/ snmpv3/taddr)
Field Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry. Displays the transport addresses. Displays the SNMP UDP port number. This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message. The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.

62

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
Name MP Model --------------- -------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv

Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/ tparam)
Field Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry. Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support. Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.

Sec Level

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

63

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
Name Tag -------------------- -------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap

Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify)
Field Name Tag Description The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry. This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected.

64

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/dump
SNMPv3 Dump Information
usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------- ------ ------- ---------- ------ ------- -------- -----admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------- --------------org 1.3 v1v2only 1.3 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18

Mask ------------

Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded

vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------- ------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm admin usm adminsha

Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp

snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------- -------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

65

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/general
General System Information
On an Alteon Application Switch 2424:
Enter password: System Information at

9:06:50 Tue Oct 26, 2004

Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 1 day, 19 hours, 52 minutes and 55 seconds. Last boot: 13:13:52 Fri Oct 22, 2004 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47.80.23.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03

Software Version 22.0.2.0 (FLASH image2), active configuration.

On an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL:
Enter password: System Information at 19:03:14 Tue Oct 26, 2004 Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 2 days, 19 hours, 6 minutes and 33 seconds. Last boot: 23:56:35 Mon Oct 25, 2004 (unknown reason or power cycle) Last apply: 14:43:37 Fri Oct 22, 2004 Last save: 14:45:44 Fri Oct 22, 2004 MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:00 IP (If 20) Address: 21.10.0.1 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:1f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P315720-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Software Version 22.0.2 (FLASH image1), active configuration.

66

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC. Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning.

/info/sys/log
Show Last 30 Syslog Messages
Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1, new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH

Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of, as shown below. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message

/info/sys/savedlog
Saved Syslog Messages
Aug 20 13:54:21 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:57:53 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:57:57 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:58:23 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:58:33 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 24 14:43:43 NOTICE Aug 24 14:49:50 NOTICE Aug 24 14:51:38 NOTICE Aug 24 14:57:30 NOTICE Aug 24 15:05:54 NOTICE Aug 24 15:11:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:52 NOTICE ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 switch reset from CLI

68

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/mgmt
Management Port Information
Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up

MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:a4:8d Interface information: 47.80.23.251 255.255.254.0 Gateway information: 47.80.22.1

47.80.23.255

Use this command to display Management port information on an Alteon Application Switch including: Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto) Link (Up or down) MAC Address of the system IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

69

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/sonmp
SONMP Information
This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table. SONMP protocol is enabled on Alteon Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command, and is necessary so that an Alteon switch can be discovered by the Nortel Networks Optivity Switch Manager.When SONMP is enabled, devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets. As the network devices exchange information, a topology table is built like the one shown below.
Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------- --47.80.23.247 0 47.80.22.1 770 47.80.23.25 259 47.80.23.25 260 47.80.23.241 257 50.10.10.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg ------------------ ----- ----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type

Table 4-12 SONMP Information Parameters Description
Parameter Slot Port Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.e. not across a bridge) as the reporting agent. The current state of the sender of the topology message. the values are: topChanged—topology information has recently changed heartbeat—topology information unchanged. new—sending agent is in new state.

IP Address Seg ID

Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg

State

70

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

315393-J.0.. Maximum LAYER 2 FDB FDB per SP VLANs Static Trunk Groups LACP Trunk Groups Trunks per Trunk Group Spanning Tree Groups Monitor Ports LAYER 3 IP Interfaces IP Gateways IP Routes Static Routes ARP Entries Static ARP Entries Local Nets DNS Servers BOOTP Servers RIP Interfaces OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF LSDB Interfaces Areas Summary Ranges Virtual Links Hosts Limit 16384 8192 255 12 28 8 16 1 Current(Enabled) 54 1(1) 0(0) 16(1) 256 4+255 4096 128 8192 128 5 2 2 256 256 3 16 3 128 12288 1(1) 1+0(1+0) 7 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) Continued.2 Command Reference /info/sys/capacity System Capacity Information The following sample output from an Alteon OS 2424 displays the maximum and currently enabled switch capacity for various services and applications from Layer 2-7.Alteon OS 22.. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71 .

PORTS Port # Client Server Filter RTS Continued. 72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J..2 Command Reference BGP Peers BGP Route Aggregators Route Maps Network Filters AS Filters VRRP Routers VRRP Router Groups VRRP Interfaces SLB (LAYER 4-7) Real Servers Server Groups Virtual Servers Virtual Services Real Services Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB Domains Services Local Servers Remote Servers Remote Sites Failovers per Remote Site Networks Geographical Regions Rules Metrics Per Rule 16 16 32 256 8 1024 16 256 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0 1024 1024 1024 1024 8192 1024 8192 1024 1024 64 2 128 7 128 8 2048 32 32 5 1024 2097104 16 64 8 0(0) 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 2(2) 0(0) 7(7) 0(1) 8(8) 0(0) 0 0 0 1 0 0(0) Filters PIPs Scriptable Health Checks SNMP Health Checks Rules for URL Parsing SLB Sessions Number of Rports to Vport Domain Records Mapping Per Domain Record LAYER 4 ..Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference BWM Policies Contracts Groups Contracts per Group Time Policies per Contract GENERAL Syslog hosts RADIUS servers NTP servers SMTP hosts Mnet/Mmask End Users Panic Dumps MP memory SP memory SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Users Views Access Groups Target Address Entries Target Params Entries 512 256 32 8 2 0 1(1) 0 2 2 1 1 5 10 2 128M 128M 16 128 32 16 16 0 0 0 1 0 3 5 2 0 0 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73 .0.

8.80.12 Jun 22 15:32:57 ERROR cli: No apply needed Jun 22 15:35:33 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 22 15:40:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 23 12:13:04 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.1 operational Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.27.81.6 Continued 74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. 2008 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47.99 Jul 2 9:56:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin logout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 9:41:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. topology change detected Jun 22 15:28:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. Last 30 syslog message information: Jun 22 15:16:00 NOTICE system: link up on port 9 Jun 22 15:16:30 NOTICE system: rebooted (power cycle) Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.23.27. January 2005 .12 Jun 23 12:13:39 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 23 12:13:53 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI.81.0.81. 2004 Software Version 22.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03 6.25. Jun 23 12:18:36 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 30 12:32:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. 7 minutes and 58 seconds.25.0.12 Jul 6 9:47:06 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 10:22:32 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.1 enabled Jun 22 15:17:05 ALERT stp: STG 1.6 Jun 30 12:37:26 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 2 9:51:57 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. active configuration.25.0.80.0 (FLASH image1).81. Last boot: 15:15:56 Tue Jun 22.22.80.2 Command Reference /info/sys/dump System Information Dump System Information at 10:23:41 Tue Jul Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 13 days. 19 hours.81.22.

------------------------iso 1 included v1v2only included v1v2only excluded v1v2only excluded 1 Mask ------------ Type ---- 1. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5.Alteon OS 22.-------.6. NO PRIVACY Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV -----------.------testgrp usm v1v2grp snmpv1 v1v2only wyingrp usm admingrp usm test1grp usm test2grp usm Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.1. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH.3.3.6. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75 .15 1.3.2 Command Reference Management port information: Speed ----10/100 Duplex -----any Link ---disabled Interface information: Gateway information: Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:0E:40:2F:5B:00 usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------test wyin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model ---------.0.3.--------noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso iso noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso noAuthNoPriv authPriv noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv exact exact exact exact iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------.-----.-----.1.6.16 Continued 315393-J. NO PRIVACY NO AUTH.6.

1.0.--------------.6.---------.3.--------.--------------.------Slot IP address Seg MAC address Chassis Type Port Id ----.-------------------.6.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.---.------------Local Seg ----State ----- 76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.---------.------------------------------.---------------.------------.-------.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.Alteon OS 22.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.18 vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name Group Name ---------. January 2005 .-----------------------snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm test testgrp usm wyin wyingrp usm test1 test1grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.2 Command Reference v1v2only excluded 1.---.3.

January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77 . see page 78.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp stg trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show STG information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. For details. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details. For details. see page 80. see page 83. trunk When trunk groups are configured. stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled. 315393-J. For details. see page 87. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu.0.

You can also enter the MAC address using the format. For example. 080020123456.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt . xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. [Forwarding Database Menu] find .Show all FDB entries NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch. including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details. Each SP supports up to 8K entries. xxxxxxxxxxxx. dump Displays all Layer 2 information. see page 88.2 Command Reference Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information.Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump .Show FDB entries on a single port trunk . For example. Enter the MAC address using the format.Alteon OS 22.Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. January 2005 . 78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan . /info/l2/fdb Layer 2 FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. 08:00:20:12:34:56.0. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device.

but has only been seen as a destination address. When in the trunking (TRK) state. means that it has been learned by the switch. no outbound port is indicated.Alteon OS 22.---. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK).------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state. the port field represents the trunk group number.0. /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79 . When an address is in the unknown state.” 315393-J. 0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. For more information. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports.----. see page 79. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.-------------. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk.---.2 Command Reference Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number.

Show LACP aggregator information for the port . To view a sample output.2 Command Reference If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF). To view a sample output.0. 80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 451. Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB. see port <port index 1 to max num ports> Displays information of an LACP port.Show all LACP ports information Table 4-15 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu Options (/info/ lacp) Command Syntax and Usage aggr <aggregator index 1 to max num ports> Displays information an LACP aggregator. the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server. If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP). /info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu The following menu options display the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) information on the Alteon OS. the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router.Show LACP port information . see dump Displays LACP information of all the ports. Use this command to verify the state of ports in an LACP trunk group. see page 83. [LACP Menu] aggr port dump .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . To view a sample output.

2 Command Reference /info/lacp/aggr LACP Aggregator Information Aggregator Id 1 ---------------------------------------------MAC address .300 Actor Oper Key .32768 Actor System ID .1 ready .10 index 0 port 1 index 1 port 2 index 2 port 3 index 3 port 4 index 4 port 5 index 5 port 6 index 6 port 7 index 7 port 8 index 8 port 9 index 9 port 10 315393-J.FALSE Actor Admin Key . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81 .TRUE Number of Ports in aggr .Alteon OS 22.300 Partner System Priority .00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 Partner Oper Key .00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 Individual .32768 Partner System ID .0.00:01:81:2e:a1:d1 Actor System Priority .

Alteon OS 22.0x0 Partner Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Long FALSE FALSE Aggregation: Distributing: TRUE FALSE Long Aggregation: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE TRUE Long Aggregation: TRUE Continued 82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.TRUE Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor System ID System Priority Admin Key Oper Key Port Number Port Priority Admin System Priority Oper System Priority Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Key Oper Key Admin Port Number Admin Port Priority Oper Port Number Oper Port Priority 00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 32768 300 300 1 32768 0 32768 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 0 1 0 0 4 32768 Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Actor Admin Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:FALSE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Actor Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:TRUE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Partner Admin Port state . January 2005 .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/port LACP Port Information port 1 ---------------------------------------------lacp_enabled .TRUE lacp_admin_enabled .0.

0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83 .Selected .LACP_RX_CURRENT_STATE .FALSE .LACP_PERIODIC_SLOW_STATE .Alteon OS 22.1 .1 .2 Command Reference Synchronization: TRUE Defaulted: FALSE Collecting: Expired: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE Rx machine state Mux machine state Periodic machine state Individual Selected Aggregator ID Attached Aggregator ID ready_n ntt selected port_moved Collision and Detection state .LACP_MUX_COL_DIS_STATE .FALSE .FALSE .FALSE turned ON! 315393-J.

January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/lacp/dump LACP Dump Information port attached trunk aggr ------------------------------------------------------------------1 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 2 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 3 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 4 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 5 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 6 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 7 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 8 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 9 active 300 300 n 32768 --10 active 300 300 n 32768 --11 active 300 300 n 32768 --12 active 300 300 n 32768 --13 active 300 300 n 32768 --14 off 14 14 n 32768 --15 off 15 15 n 32768 --16 off 16 16 n 32768 --17 off 17 17 n 32768 --18 off 18 18 n 32768 --19 off 19 19 n 32768 --20 off 20 20 n 32768 --21 off 21 21 n 32768 --22 off 22 22 n 32768 --23 off 23 23 n 32768 --24 off 24 24 n 32768 --25 off 25 25 n 32768 --26 off 26 26 n 32768 --27 off 27 27 n 32768 --28 off 28 28 n 32768 --lacp adminkey operkey selected prio 84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.0.

2 Command Reference /info/l2/stg Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information When multiple paths exist on a network.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled.Alteon OS 22. Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------. NOTE – Alteon OS 22. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.------- 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 The switch software uses the IEEE 802.0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85 . you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time 315393-J.0.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups.

the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. in seconds. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment.0. LEARNING. Generally speaking.2 Command Reference You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters. the faster the port. Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge.Alteon OS 22. the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. in seconds. in seconds. FORWARDING. or DISABLED. The state field shows the current state of the port. LISTENING. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. The state field can be either BLOCKING. The aging time parameter specifies. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. The hello time parameter specifies. The maximum age parameter specifies. January 2005 . in seconds. The forward delay parameter specifies. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. MaxAge FwdDel Aging priority (port) Cost State 86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.

you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.2 Command Reference Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued) Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge. When trunk groups are configured.0. combining their bandwidth to create a single. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87 . Designated port /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. larger virtual link. 315393-J. the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices. a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772. Trunk group 1. This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch. bw contract 256. The designated port identifies a physical port. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number.Alteon OS 22. port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding. For example. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together.

----Default VLAN ena n 256 ena 1-28 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state.2 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------.----. January 2005 .0.Alteon OS 22. VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN 88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.----.-----.---. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.

------ 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89 .0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/l2/dump Layer2 Dump Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Hello 2 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 MaxAge 20 Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.

broadcast address. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address. see page 93. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. subnet mask. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. and operational status. includes: IP interface information: Interface number. see page 104. For details. To view menu options. see page 96. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. see page 91. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. IP address. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. lnet and lmask Port status 90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. ip Displays IP Information. For details. Using the options of this menu. IP information. VLAN number. For details. and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status.Alteon OS 22. see page 98. gateway number. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops.2 Command Reference /info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. IP address. or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details. January 2005 . subnet mask.0.

tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag. see Table 4-19 on page 92.2 Command Reference Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu.17. 192.Show if .Show dump .Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below. For a description of IP routing types.Show gw .Alteon OS 22. /info/l3/route IP Routing Information [IP Routing Menu] find . dump Displays all Layer 3 information.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address.4.Show tag . NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91 . see Table 4-20 on page 93.17. see page 105. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. 315393-J.Show type . if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface. 192.0. gw <default gateway address (such as. For a description of IP routing types.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. For details.4.

0.22.0.0.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.23. Indicates a broadcast route.0 martian martian * 224.6 255.80.0.255.0.255 broadcast broadcast Type Parameters The following table describes the Type parameters.249 local addr 1 * 47.255.23. Indicates a multicast route.0.0.255.0. see page 92.5 255. Packets to this destination are discarded. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.0.255.0.255.0.80.0 multicast addr * 255.Alteon OS 22.0 47.0 0.249 255.255.22.255.0.249 direct fixed 1 * 47.255.0.0.0.0.80.0. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. Table 4-19 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type) Parameter indirect Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.2 Command Reference Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all routes configured in the switch.0 224.0 255.--------------.1 indirect static 1 * 47.0 0.255 47.255.0.255.80.0.80.0 multicast addr * 224.255.255 47.23.0.------------.0.-* 0. /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .0. direct local broadcast martian multicast 92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. For more information.255 0.255 255.255 255.255 255.--------.23.23.255.0.255.80.80.254. January 2005 .255.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127.----.255 0.0 47.0.0.0 255. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.0 martian martian * 224.255.0 0.

0. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache. The address belongs to a filtered group. Table 4-20 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag) Parameter fixed static Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip /info/l3/Arp ARP Information Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address. VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.Show ARP address list 315393-J. The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).Show all ARP entries help .2 Command Reference Tag Parameters The following table describes the Tag parameters. [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Alteon OS 22. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. In any IP communication.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt .Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93 .

ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P . see page 95. IP interface. 192. IP mask. R .Layer 4 IP address (VIP) u . and port referencing information. e.Unresolved ARP entry. help Displays help on the ARP field entries.g. address status flags (see Table 4-22 on page 95). MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address. 94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. VLAN and port for the address. etc. MAC address. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J . VIP. and VLAN flags.17. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single SP.4. January 2005 . including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information.2 Command Reference The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry.0.Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 .101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. For details. dump Displays all ARP entries. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port. The MAC address has not been learned. see page 95.Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request). vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN. Table 4-21 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.Alteon OS 22.

Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address.---.---1. The MAC address has not been learned.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 47. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports).10.11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 Referenced SPs ------------1-4 1-4 empty 1-4 1-4 empty empty Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry.31.1. the designated port will be the normal ingress port. the referenced port will be the designated port. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-22 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag P P 4 Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.----------------.10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 172. Unresolved ARP entry.249 P MAC address VLAN Port ----------------.11.22.23. this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example).3.1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 10. ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN R U J 315393-J.---.0.31.80.31.80.80. So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address. NOTE – If you have VMA turned on.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/refpt Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP IP address Flags ------------.----00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 1 Referenced SPs -----------1-4 /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------.3. Indirect route entry.10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 47.Alteon OS 22.3.10. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95 . If you have VMA turned off.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.----47.----.23.

255 255.255.255.255.Show all BGP peers summary . See page 97 for a sample output.255. For more information.4.31.255 MAC address ----------------00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 VLAN ---Flags ----- D 1 1 1 /info/l3/bgp BGP Information Menu Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks.255. message received. up/down.1 172.3.1.23.255. See page 98 for a sample output.200 172.11.255. summary Displays peer summary information such as AS.1 47. refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and the Application Guide.10 1.1 172. 96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. message sent. See page 97 for a sample output.255.0.31. [BGP Menu] peer .255 255.Show BGP routing table Table 4-23 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information.Alteon OS 22. state.10.31.81 IP mask --------------255.80.255 255.255. January 2005 .10.255 255.255.4.Show all BGP peers in summary dump .255.255 255.255.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address --------------10. dump Displays the BGP routing table.

0. Local AS: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).-------.1. Local router ID: 1. Holdtime: 0.1 . Old status: idle Total received packets: 0.178.1.201.-------.1.0.201.15. Local router ID: 1. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0.0.0.148 0 148 0 0 never connect 315393-J. version 0.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 2: 205.0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.-------.Alteon OS 22. BGP Peer Information: 3: 2. Holdtime: 0.1. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.23.5 BGP status: idle. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. BGP Peer Summary Information: Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State --------------.4 .1..0. Local AS: 0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97 .---------1: 205.0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0.5 BGP status: idle.178. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0. version 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).-------. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 /info/l3/bgp/summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides.1.

? .17. known as the backbone.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone.0 205. January 2005 .Show summary address list nsumadd .0. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). The backbone acts as the central OSPF area.---.Show area(s) information if .15.178.--------------.0.Alteon OS 22. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.21.147 1 128 *> 205.Show details of virtual links nbr . i .----.0. > best.0 * 205.178.Show neighbor(s) information dbase .Show OSPF information 98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and your Alteon OS Application Guide.Show interface(s) information virtual .Show general information aindex .0.----*> 10. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/dump Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.0 0.0. which then distributes it to other areas as needed.21.Show OSPF routes dump . one area must be designated as area 0.147 1 256 *>i205.178.178. >> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid.Show NSSA summary address list routes .178. In any AS with multiple areas.147 1 256 Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ? /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.0 205. The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas.EGP. [OSPF Information Menu] general . e .internal Origin codes: i .0 205.0. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.IGP.21.0.178.147 1 128 13.Database Menu sumaddr .21.

315393-J. dbase Displays OSPF database menu. nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. nbr <nbr router-id (A. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. it displays area information for all the areas.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. See page 100 for a sample output. See page 100 for a sample output.2 Command Reference Table 4-24 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.Alteon OS 22. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99 . See for a sample output.0.B. If no router ID is supplied.C. if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no parameter is supplied. If no parameter is supplied. dump Display all the OSPF information. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. See page 102 for a sample output. see page 101. To view menu options. it displays information for all the interfaces. routes Displays OSPF routing table. it displays the information about all the current neighbors.

Area 0.10.0. Ip Address 10.1. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.14.10. State DR.1.0.10.1.12.2 Timer intervals.12.0.12.1.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.Alteon OS 22. Admin Status UP Router ID 10. Authentication type none 100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.10. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2. Wait 1663. of which 2 are >=INIT state.10. Poll interval 0. Hello 10. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1. 2 are >=EXCH state.0.23. Dead 40.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes. Ip Address 10.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10.80.0.10.10. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47.10. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1. Retransmit 5.

c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs. ext <adv-rtr (A.D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs.Network LS Database info nssa .C. d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.1.NSSA External LS Database info rtr .1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. 315393-J.0.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter. d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined. b) the total number of LSAs for each area.B.1.B.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.B.1.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm .C.C.LS Database summary ext . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101 .All Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1.Self Originated LS Database info summ . c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .1. b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.1.C. The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.External LS Database info nw . The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .Alteon OS 22.1.1. dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.B.1. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.Network-Summary LS Database info all . for example: 20. No parameters are required.Router LS Database info self .1.C.

N1 .C.1.1.OSPF NSSA external type 1.18.1.1.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D)>|<link_state_id (A. all Displays all the LSAs.1.0/27 via 20.8/32 via 30.18.2/32 via 30.1.2 E2 172.1.OSPF external type 2 IA 10. No parameters are required.18. N2 .B. E2 .OSPF inter area.B.C.B. summ <adv-rtr (A.B.1.1.2 IA 100.7/32 via 30.1.1.1.18.C.1.1.1.1.1.1. rtr <adv-rtr (A.D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1.1.18.D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.1/32 via 30.2 E2 172.1.0.2 E2 172.1.B.2 102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.1.1.18.1.2 E2 172.1.B.1.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.2 Command Reference Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage nw <adv-rtr (A.2 IA 40.5/32 via 30.B.1.C.OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 . self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.C.4/32 via 30.B.1.1.6/32 via 30.1. January 2005 .1.2 E2 172.D)>|<link_state_id (A.18.2 E2 172.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.0/24 via 200. nssa <adv-rtr (A.0/28 via 20.network LS database.C.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.2 IA 140.0.0/28 via 200.OSPF external type 1.1.2 IA 150.D)>|<link_state_id (A.2 E2 172.1.2 IA 80.3/32 via 30.1. /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes: IA .1.18.C.Alteon OS 22.1.10.0/24 via 20.1.1.0/16 via 200.C.2 E2 172.1.1.

Alteon OS 22.0. of which 0 are >=INIT state. AS Boundary Router: no External LSA count 0 Number of interfaces in this router is 0 Number of virtual links in this router is 0 0 new lsa received and 0 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 0 Total neighbors are 0.1. 0 are =FULL state Number of areas is 0. of which 0-transit 0-nssa OSPF Neighbors: Intf NeighborID ---.1.1.2 Command Reference /info/ospf/dump OSPF Dump Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 1.---------- Prio ---- State ----- Address ------- OSPF LS Database: OSPF LSDB breakdown for router with ID (1.1. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103 .1 Started at 42 and the process uptime is 1197051 Area Border Router: no.1) No areas enabled. 315393-J. 0 are >=EXCH state.

dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1.1 255.254. up vlan 1. 172. January 2005 .1.0.1.0 2: 172.1.3.23.31.31.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information Interface information: 1: 47. up vlan 1.255.22.80. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON.23.1 lsdb limit 0 104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255.31.255. 172. vlan 1. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47.31.80.255.3.0 3: 172.1 255.4.255. vlan any.255.255.Alteon OS 22.255.81 255.80.4.0 47.

prio 100.1. prio 118. prio 118. 172. 28: vrid 28. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.200. server 255: vrid 255. 14. renter.200. master 11. master 12. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. backup 172. renter. renter.202. if if if if if if if if if if 10.2.1. prio 102. master.0.2.2. prio 110. prio 102. 11. if 3: vrid 3. renter.18.2 Command Reference /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. 315393-J.18. 172. master 28.200.1. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. prio 100.2. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for more information on VRRP. 205.1. 14: vrid 14.200.200. 27: vrid 27.178. 28.2. renter.2. renter. prio 118.200. if 172. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command.2. 20. backup 1. renter. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. proxy When virtual routers are configured.100. renter. master 14. if 28. 12: vrid 12. 13.178. renter.200. renter. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. master.2. server 1. 1.1. 20: vrid 20. 205.210. prio 110. backup 20.8. prio 118. renter.21.8. renter. renter.100. prio 102.100. 28. 12. 100: vrid 100. prio 110.2.1. renter. master. based on a number of priority criteria. VRRP information: 10: vrid 10. master 27. if 2: vrid 1.Alteon OS 22.1. If the master fails. server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2.1. 10. 13: vrid 13.200. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105 .178. renter. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.200. backup 13. 27. prio 102.21. server 172: vrid 172.2. 11: vrid 11. 205. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. master if 27. prio 110.1. 27.18. backup. master. 254: vrid 254.1. prio 100.204.

Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured. backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services. Server status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers.Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 . 106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. Proxy status. During the election process. These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.2 Command Reference Priority value. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address.

0.255. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current BGP settings: ON. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107 .2 Command Reference /info/l3/dump Layer3 Dump Information This command dumps all the information about Layer 3 parameters.255. IP information: IP information: Router ID: 45.1. static disabled.0. up Default gateway information: metric strict Current IP forwarding settings: ON.1.Alteon OS 22.1.0.255.255. adv 60 retry 120.255 .201. enabled metric none. rip disabled. ras 300.0 45.1.201 255.21.0 3: 205. AS number 100 Interface information: 2: 45. up vlan 1. AS number 100 Current BGP peer settings: 1: 45.1.1.1.255.203. pref 100.0 4: 172.254 255. orig 15. 172. ospf disabled fixed disabled. This dump is a collection of all the individual commands described in the sections above. 205.1. vip disabled in-rmap: empty out-rmap: empty Current BGP aggr settings: Continued 315393-J. alive 60. vlan 1.255 .1. default none.1.255 .1. ttl 1.21.255.201 255. hold 180. up vlan 1.1.

255.0.----.255.0.255.1.255.---.6 00:09:6b:00:71:bb 1 24 empty 205.1.255 205.5 00:09:6b:00:74:97 1 24 empty 205.1.0 255.1.0 255.1 00:09:6b:b5:0b:d6 1 24 empty 205.202 00:09:97:5e:69:00 1 24 empty 172.1.1.1.255.1.1.255 45.----00:01:81:2e:a2:2e D 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 Route table information: Status code: * .1.255 172.254 local addr 4 * 172.1.255 172.1.0 45.0.255 MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------.1.255.255broadcast broadcast 2 * 127.1.100 P 4 00:01:81:2e:a2:2e 1-4 205.1.255 172.---------------45.-* 45.0 255.255 255.1.21.201 direct fixed 2 * 45.255.--------------205.21.255.------------.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 ARP address information: IP address IP mask --------------.1.255.255.1.1.21.1.254 255. ARP cache information: IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.21.100 255.0.1.0 martian martian * 172.0.255.0.------------.1.1.1.1.1.75 00:0f:06:ec:8a:00 1 24 empty 45.0.0.255 broadcast broadcast 4 Continued 108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255 255.0.254 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 205.2 Command Reference Virtual Router Redundancy is globally turned OFF.1.1.255.1.Alteon OS 22.255.255.255.255.1.21.1.1.254 255.----.255 45.2 00:09:6b:b5:08:48 1 24 empty 205.255.1.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 45.1.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.1.201 local addr 2 * 45.0 0.1.-----------.1.3 00:09:6b:00:6f:b7 1 24 empty 205.----------------.255.1.201 255.21.201 255.201 255.4 00:09:6b:00:76:1b 1 24 empty 205.21.1.0 172.0.255.1.21.254 direct fixed 4 * 172.---.255. January 2005 .255.0.255 45.255.1.1.

1.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 224.internal Origin codes: i .100 direct vip * 205. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109 .255.0.--------------*> 45.EGP.1.----.0 0 ? 315393-J.255 broadcast broadcast OSPF is disabled.0 0.255 205.0.0.0 255.0.0.0.1.0.255 205. Status codes: * valid.2 Command Reference * 205.255.1.0.255.201 direct fixed 3 * 205.----.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path --------------.1.0. > best.1.1.201 local addr 3 * 205.0 205.255.255 255.255.255.0 0 ? *> 172.255.0 224. i .1.0 martian martian * 255.201 255.1.0 0.21.0.1.1.255.0.255.255 255.--------------.1.0.255.0.0 0.255. e . ? .100 255.1.1.255.255 255.0.0 0.255.0 0 ? *> 205.1.----.1.1.0.IGP.255.1.255 205.Alteon OS 22.1.

In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing.: [Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess . Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. see page 117.Session Table Information Menu gslb . each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services.Show all layer 4 information Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. gslb Displays the Global SLB Information Menu. MAC address. VLAN. it can become overutilized.Show filter information port . phash. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number.Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind . 110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. real IP address. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature.2 Command Reference /info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. To view menu options. see page 112.Show real server selected by hash.Show real server information virt . With this software feature.Show virtual server information filt .Show port information idshash .Alteon OS 22. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. RIP and Rport synatk .0.Decode the HEX value to get VIP. To view menu options.Show SYN attack detection information dump . and health check result.Global SLB Information Menu real . physical switch port. January 2005 . or minmisses metric cookie . layer where health check is performed.

dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. or minmisses metric. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash. and client and/or server Layer 4 activity. destination port. proxy IP address. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. 315393-J. real server group. IP address. for example. and real server group. port <port number> Displays the physical port number. URL for health checks. cookie <16 or 20 bytes cookie value in HEX as 0xXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address. synatk Displays SYN attack detection information.2 Command Reference Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number. filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number. health check layer. backup server. server port mapping. group backup server. virtual MAC address Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack. the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time. a list of applied filters. phash. see page 118. and real server port. This feature requires dbind to be enabled. real server port. IP address. real server IP address.0.Alteon OS 22. and status. group backup server. real server group. For details. filter status. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111 . every two seconds.

Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport .Show all session entries on sp dump .Session entry description Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address. flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|Vi|Vr|Vs|Vm|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.Show all session entries with proxy port filter . dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port. filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter.0.Show all session entries with destination port pip .Show all session entries with destination IP address dport . cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port.Show all session entries help .2 Command Reference /info/slb/sess Session Table Information [Session Table Information Menu] cip . 112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port.Show all session entries with matching flag port .Show all session entries with source port dip . See “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115 for a description of these options. pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address. dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address.Show all session entries with real IP address sp .Show all session entries with matching filter flag .Show all session entries with ingress port real .Show all session entries with source IP address cport .

3. 39. 39.24. are described in “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115. Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications L4 HTTP 3.19 6970.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation.1 4586.21.3.16: 172.2.144.51 http -> 192.2. the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113 315393-J.12.2.1.2.81.2.0.81.1 http -> 47.21.01: 172.2 3567 3.1.12.12.144.01: 172.2.2.01: 172.81.1. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3.19 1040. dump Displays all session entries.2 Command Reference Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port.21.2. sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor. help Displays the description of the session entry.168.12.21. January 2005 . Information similar to the following may appear in a session entry dump: 3.Alteon OS 22.2. 2. 39. 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Note: The fields.2.144.2.8.01: 172.81.01: 172. 172.24.21. 39.21.8.3.19 1040.81.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3.1 http -> 47.21.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2.1 21220 -> 47.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection.1 rtsp -> 47.12.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP 3. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.19 6970.1 http -> 1.1.19 4586. 01: 1.1 rtsp -> 47.200 44687. 39.2.1.

81.2.20.4.168.123 160. 172.2.144. 205.21.05: 172.01: 172.200 0 172.200 ftp-data ->172.31.215 4102.1 21220 -> 47.12.4.3. 172.215 80.2.3.3.2 Command Reference 3.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2.00: 237. 172.178.00: 172.10.215 4098.4.81.16 2559.31.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2.4.19 4586.31.4.19 6970.4.8. 10.52.09: 172.09: 172.1.20 ftp age 10 EU 1.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1.4.144.31.200 ftp ->172.31. 39.31.31.31.84 http -> 192. 39. real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.21.07: 10.0.0.2. January 2005 .26 1706.11 age 8 EP c:1 1.31.1.162.12.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port.14. 114 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.01: 172.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3.21.1 rtsp -> 47.Alteon OS 22.0.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3.

3.01: 1. Deny or NAT. It will show ALLOW. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. For load balancing. 2. 2.168.2. For example: 3.1. 2.1 http -> 3.1. This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch. If the switch does not find live server. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to. If the switch does not find a live server. This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. For example: 3.2. this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to.2. It will show “ALLOW”.2. this field contains the same information as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5).1 rtsp -> 2.2.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering. (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address (7) Proxy Port This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch.3.1. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 115 .1 http-> 192.2 Command Reference Session dump information in Alteon OS Field (1) SP number Description This field indicates the Switch Processor number that created the session.Alteon OS 22.1 http age 10 3.3. 2. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch.1.1.1 1040.1 1040.01: 1.0. for load balancing.3.2.1 http age 10 f:11 2. Deny or NAT.1 6970.1.07: 1.2.1 http -> 3. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.2. this field also shows the real server IP address. “DENY” or “NAT” instead.2. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet. DENY or NAT instead.01: 1.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E (8) Real Server IP Address 315393-J.4.1.1. this field is the same as destination IP address (as in row 5).1 1706.2. This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering.

For example. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session. “Vs”: Indicates the session is a SIP SUBSCRIBE session.The session is aged out in 10 minutes. the session is freed. idslb. Fields (6). (10) Age This is the session timeout value. wcr. This field can be urlwcr. “Vr”: Indicates the session is a SIP REGISTER session. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding Layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server. 116 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. “U”: Indicates the session is Layer 7 delayed binding and the switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server.2 Command Reference Field (9) Server port Description This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. If no packet is received within the value specified. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting for every client entry. “N”: Indicates no NAT. “Vi”: Indicates the session is a SIP INVITE session. “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting for every client entry. This indicates that slowage is used. “Vm”: Indicates the session is a SIP MESSAGE session. January 2005 . The user can configure slowage by using the command: /cfg/slb/adv/slowage. (11) Filter number (12) Flag This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria. It is for internal use only.0.The session is aged out in 160 minutes. (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. or Cookie Pbind. this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation. “E”: Indicates the session is established and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value. For RTSP UDP session. “P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. (13) Persistent session user count This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session. if: age 10 . linkslb or nonat. “Ri”: Indicates the session is ICMP rate limiting per-client entry. which means the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server. age < 160 .

Show Global SLB dump .Show all Global virtual server information remote site information rule information geographical preference information SLB information Table 4-28 Global SLB Information Menu Options (/info/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the Global SLB virtual server information such as the domain name of the virtual server.Show Global SLB site . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 117 .2 Command Reference /info/slb/gslb Global SLB Information Menu An Alteon OS running Global SLB selects the most appropriate site to direct the client traffic for a given domain during the initial client connection.Show Global SLB rule . and the group of real servers associated with the local and remote virtual servers. dump Displays all Global SLB information. 315393-J. the number of the local and remote virtual servers. the number of virtual services on those virtual servers.0. site Displays the Global SLB remote site information.Alteon OS 22. The menu for this feature displays the following information: [Global SLB Information Menu] virt .Show Global SLB geo . geo Displays the Global SLB geographical preference information.

2. January 2005 . up 210.102.20.1.200.20. filters: 200 idslb filt enabled. port 8. 00:01:02:71:9c:a6. 1 ms.2 Command Reference /info/slb/dump Show All Layer 4 Information Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210.20. up 20. vlan 1.20. vlan any 200: group 1. up 2: 210. filters: 50 200 118 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20.20. backup none. 2 ms. health 3.2. group 88.101. health 3.2.20.200. 00:03:47:07:a4:9e. vlan 1. vlan 1. up Virtual server state: 1: 20.1. backup none. filters: 200 filt disabled.20.0. backup none proxy enabled.20. health 3. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http. health 3. 2 ms. backup none.1. port 6.200. rport 3128.Alteon OS 22. 00:01:02:c1:4b:48. 00:01:02:70:4d:4a.101. vlan 1. 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http. port 7. radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210. 3 ms. up 20.1.1. port 1. filters: 80 idslb filt enabled.102. up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled. backup none.20. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20.20. health 3.2. backup none.1.

any. or auto) Link status (up or down) 315393-J. 10/100.Alteon OS 22.0. 100. yes. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. including: Port number Port speed (10. full. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 119 .2 Command Reference /info/link Link Status Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Speed ----10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 1000 1000 1000 1000 Duplex -------any any any any any any any any half any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any full full full full Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down down down down down up down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Alteon Application Switch slot.

January 2005 .0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/port Port Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tag --n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---e d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d PVID ---1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BWC ----256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 NAME -------------VLAN(s) --------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Port information includes: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether Remote Monitor is enabled or disabled Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port 120 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.

See page 122 for sample output. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 121 . Traffic classification can be based on user or application information.Alteon OS 22. receive higher priority versus non-criticaltraffic.2 Command Reference /info/bwm Bandwidth Management Information Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. cont Displays the BWM contract information configured on this switch. such as e-commerce transactions.Show Bandwidth Management Contract information Table 4-29 Bandwidth Management Information Command Syntax and Usage ipuser Displays the IP user entries with their IP addresses. 315393-J. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command: [Bandwidth Management Information Menu] ipuser .BWM IP User Entries Information Menu cont .0.

but only for the specified sp number. 1-256> Displays the IP user entries for a specific BWM contract. cont <BW Contract number.0.Show all IP user entries Table 4-30 BWM IP User Information Menu (/info/bwm/ipuser) Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP address> Displays the IP user entries for a specific IP address.Show all IP user entries on sp dump . dump Displays all the IP user entries. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the IP user entries on the Switch Processor. 122 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /info/bwm/ipuser BWM IP User Information Menu [BWM IP User Entries Information Menu] ip . The same fields as described in cont above are displayed.Show all IP user entries with IP address cont .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .Show all IP user entries for a contract sp .

1.1.---------.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference The format of the output of the above commands: SP Contract IP Address Age Octets Discards Allowed Offered Rate Rate -.108 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.0.104 16 204554 0 99 99 2 10 11.0.0.1.103 16 196864 0 96 96 2 10 11.1.--.0.0.1.1.0.----2 11 11. Contract Rate: the BWM contract number of the ipuser entry.---------------.---------.0.0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 123 .107 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.100 86 21500000 301001440 1953 29297 2 10 11.106 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.102 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.0.101 16 201478 0 98 98 2 10 11.109 16 203016 0 99 99 SP Rate: the switch processor number (1-4) of the ipuser entry. Octets: the number of octets processed on this ipuser entry Discards: the number of octets discarded on this ipuser entry Allowed Rate: the rate of traffic allowed for this IP address Offered Rate: the rate including the discards for this IP address 315393-J. IP address: the IP address of the ipuser entry.1.1.100 86 1076600 0 97 97 2 10 11.1. Age: the age of the entry in seconds.0.1.0.1.105 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.-------.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/bwm/cont
BWM Contract Information
Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in a minute to 'abcd' at host '100.81.138.26' BWM IP user table entries 64k

Contract Policy Per User Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv Limit Key State Shaping 1 123456789012345 2 1 50M 1M 500K E D 2 vlan 4 1 60M 2M 500K E D 3 filter 7 20 2M 1M 500K E D 4 5 1 2M 1M 500K D D 5 512 1 2M 1M 500K E D 10 10 1 1M 0K 0K 500K sip E D 11 11 1 100M 80M 500K 2M sip E D 12 12 1 2M 1M 500K E D 13 13 1 3M 1M 500K E D 14 14 1 4M 400K 100K E D 15 15 1 2M 1M 500K E D

This command displays information about any configured contracts and the BWM policies applied to the contracts. Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Contract Policy Description

Displays the BWM contract number. Displays specific information about a policy applied to a contract. Includes the following:
The policy number applied to the contract Prec: the precedence applied to the policy Hard: the hard limit applied to the policy Soft: the soft limit applied to the policy Resv: the reserve limit applied to the policy

124

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Per User Description These two columns display information for an ipuser limit, if applied to the contract. Includes the following: Limit: the user rate limit applied to the ipuser. Key: If an ipuser rate limit is enforced, this field displays whether the user limit is enforced on a source IP address (sip) or a destination IP address (dip). Displays whether the BWM contract is enabled (E) or disabled (D).

State Traffic Shaping

Displays whether Traffic Shaping is enabled (E) or disabled (D) for this contract.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

125

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/security Security Information
This command displays information about the current security settings that includes: rate threshold for security logging
whether the out-of-order IP fragment packets have the option of allow or deny on the filters

the current IP addresses in the Access Control List (ACL) the current UDP blast protection settings the current port security settings
Current security settings: seclog 128 fragment allow pdepth none Current IP address ACL settings: Number Address Mask -------- ---------------- ---------------Current UDP blast protection settings: UDP Port ----------1-5000 Packet Rate (per second) -----------------------20

Port security state:

126

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/swkey Software Enabled Keys
For optional Layer 4 switching software, the information would be displayed as follows:
Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Inbound Linklb Intelligent Traffic Management

Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For information on ordering optional software license keys, see “How to Get Help” on page 18.

/info/dump Information Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

127

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

128

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 5

The Statistics Menu
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.

/stats Statistics Menu
[Statistics Menu] port - Port Stats Menu l2 - Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 - Layer 3 Stats Menu slb - Server Load Balancing (L4-7) Stats Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Stats Menu mp - MP-specific Stats Menu sp - SP-specific Stats Menu security - Security Stats Menu snmp - Show SNMP stats ntp - Show NTP stats pm - Port Mirroring Stats Menu mgmt - Management Port Stats dump - Dump all stats

315393-J, January 2005

129

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 131. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 144. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 148. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. To view menu options, see page 167. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options, see page 198. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu options, see page 205. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. To view menu options, see page 210. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 212. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. See page 218 for a sample output and description of SNMP statistics. ntp <clear> Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 222 for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics. You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics. pm Displays Port Mirroring Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 224. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. See page 224 for sample output. dump Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 225.

130

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
[Port Statistics Menu] brg - Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether - Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if - Show interface ("if") stats ip - Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link - Show link stats rmon - Show RMON stats dump - Dump port stats clear - Clear all port stats

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)
Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 132 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 133 for a sample output and the description of statistics. if Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 136 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ip Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 138 for a sample output and the description of statistics. link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 139 for a sample output and the description of statistics. rmon Displays Remote Monitor (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 140 for a sample output and the description of statistics. dump Displays all the port statistics.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

131

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage clear This command clears all the statistics on this port.

/stats/port <port number>/brg
Bridging Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.
Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:

63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0

Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding Process. The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.

dot1PortOutFrames

dot1PortInDiscards

dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards

132

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 133 . It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.Alteon OS 22. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. 315393-J.0. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.2 Command Reference Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards Description The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges.3 Layer Management.

This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. ifOutMulticastPkts. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. section 7.4. Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.802. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.2. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std.6. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot3StatsSQETestErrors 134 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFCSErrors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. ifOutMulticastPkts. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object.3 Layer Management. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.0.Alteon OS 22. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). January 2005 .31998 Edition.

0. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions. an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions.Alteon OS 22. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular. The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions Description A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. dot3StatsLateCollisions dot3StatsExcessive Collisions dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors 315393-J. The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135 . even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object.

according to the conventions of IEEE 802. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors dot3CollFrequencies /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFrameTooLongs Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted.0. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4].3 Layer Management. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). In particular.Alteon OS 22. For example. January 2005 .

which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. dot3StatsFrameTooLongs. ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts ifHCInDiscards ifHCInErrors ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutDiscards 315393-J. including the MAC header and FCS. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface. which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. For a MAC layer protocol. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface.layer. including those that were discarded or not sent. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface.Alteon OS 22. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. dot3StatsFCSErrors. including the MAC header and FCS. The number of packets. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137 . This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface. including those that were discarded or not sent. this includes both Group and Functional addresses.layer.0. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. including those that were discarded or not sent. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub.

dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions.Alteon OS 22. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCOutErrors Description The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors. including those received in error.0. dot3StatsLateCollisions. /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. This count includes invalid addresses (for example.0. this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). January 2005 . In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. 0.0. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors.Route option processing was successful. IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: 0 0 Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. and the Source. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. Class E).

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139 . The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds ipLANDattacks /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 4 Table 5-7 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes. 315393-J. for lack of buffer space). The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. but which were discarded (for example. The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address.0.

etherStatsOctets 140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port.8 ) Utilization = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval × 10. This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment). Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped. These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts × ( 9. the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval.Alteon OS 22. The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets.4 ) + ( Octets × 0. and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval. If greater precision is desired. 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).0.6 + 6. RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 129677 1485 734 712 0 0 0 0 0 0 954 578 35 26 16 8 Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. it is just the number of times this condition has been detected. January 2005 . respectively.

3. and multicast packets) received.) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.5 (10Base-5) and section 10. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141 . The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms.2. Note that this does not include multicast packets. but including FCS octets). This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.1. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes. Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds.1.0.2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsPkts Description The total number of packets (including bad packets.3 section 8. but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802.Alteon OS 22. and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). broadcast packets. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.4 (10Base-2). etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers 315393-J. but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. inclusive. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would.3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time).2.2. should report the same number of collisions. The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe.2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsCollisions Description The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater.3. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T. Section 8.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).0.3 (10Base-5) and section 10.1. if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously.1.Alteon OS 22. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802.1. January 2005 . The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).3 states that a station must detect a collision. A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. in the receive mode. A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected. 14.

0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/dump Port Dump Statistics Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: 1284 dot1PortOutFrames: 142 dot1PortInDiscards: 130 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: 0 dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: NA dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: NA dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsSQETestErrors: NA dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: 1 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: NA -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters Octets: 124166 19560 UcastPkts: 39 27 BroadcastPkts: 631 14 MulticastPkts: 614 101 Discards: 130 0 Errors: 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: 0 ipInAddrErrors: 0 ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 0 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 0 ipTtlExceeds: 0 ipLANDattacks: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 315393-J.

To view statistics and their description. lacp <port number (1 to max num ports)> Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics. January 2005 .2 Command Reference RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 123840 1406 698 669 0 0 0 0 0 0 906 548 35 25 16 8 /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb . see page 146. To view statistics and their description.0.Show STG stats Table 5-9 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays Forwarding Database statistics. see page 147.Show LACP stats stg .Alteon OS 22. To view statistics and their description.Show FDB stats lacp . see page 145. stg Displays Spanning Tree Group statistics. 144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-10 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database. Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.0.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/fdb FDB Statistics FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c's: max: 9611 58 850254 5832 11874 16384 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 9553 65 151373 0 0 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. lookup fails find fails overflows max 315393-J. finds. and unsuccessful searches. Number of maximum Forwarding Database entries supported by the switch. Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145 . including the number of new entries. Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database.Alteon OS 22. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database.

mitted 146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0. The number of Marker PDUs transmitted out of this port. Marker Rsp PDUs trans. The number of illegal LACP subtype received on this port.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/lacp LACP Statistics >> Layer 2 Statistics# lacp 1 port 1 Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted - 9394 0 0 0 0 8516 0 0 Table 5-11 LACP Statistics Parameters (/stats?l2/lacp) Field Description Valid LACPDUs received The number of LACPDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of valid Marker Responses that the switch received on this port. The number of unknown version or TLV type that the switch received on this port. Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted The number of valid Marker PDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of LACPDUs transmitted out of this port.Alteon OS 22.The number of Marker Responses transmitted out of this port. January 2005 .

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147 .0. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs received Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages received.Alteon OS 22. Xmt Cfg 315393-J. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs transmitted.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Statistics Spanning Tree Group 1: Port Rcv Cfg Rcv TCN ----.------------------1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 139046 176 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 20 0 0 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 Xmt Cfg ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xmt TCN ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Port Rcv cfg Rcv TCN Description Displays the port number.

Clear IP stats dump .Alteon OS 22. See page 157 for sample output. ip Displays IP statistics.OSPF Statistics Menu ip .Show UDP stats ifclear .Show route stats arp . See page 150 for sample output.0.Dump layer 3 stats Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu.2 Command Reference Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Xmt TCN Description Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages transmitted /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf .Show DNS stats icmp .Show IP stats route . 148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear . See page 159 for sample output. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics.Show ARP stats vrrp . See page 155 for sample output.Show VRRP stats dns .Show TCP stats udp .Show ICMP stats if .Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp . route Displays route statistics.

315393-J. See page 160 for sample output. See page 167 for sample output. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. dns Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. See page 161 for sample output. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 159 for sample output.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149 . Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics. tcp Displays TCP statistics. ipclear Clears IP statistics. ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics.0. icmp Displays ICMP statistics. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors.2 Command Reference Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage vrrp When virtual routers are configured. See page 163 for sample output. udp Displays UDP statistics. See page 165 for sample output. dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file.

if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics.0.Show interface(s) stats Table 5-14 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics. aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics. 150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general .Show global stats aindex .Alteon OS 22. See page 151 for sample output and details.Show area(s) stats if .

OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151 .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2005 . The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 22.0. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates 152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. January 2005 . The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153 Description Start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down 315393-J. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is.Alteon OS 22. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces.0. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is.

The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description unloop wait timer backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.0.Alteon OS 22. retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export 154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. The sum total number of interfaces. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. January 2005 . The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Intf Change Stats: hello down loop The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.

errors discovered in processing their IP options. including bad checksums. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers. Class E).0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IP Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. other format errors. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. time-to-live exceeded. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). this counter will include only those packets. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. and so forth. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. including those received in error.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155 .Route option processing was successful. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. 0.0. and the Source. ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 315393-J.0. version number mismatch.0.

2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). errors.0.Alteon OS 22. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. for example. The number of IP datagrams successfully re. for lack of buffer space). The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. but which were discarded (for example. because their Don't Fragment flag was set.assembled. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. which meet this no-route criterion. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch). Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. January 2005 . but which were discarded (for example.assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. and so forth). The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates 156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. for lack of buffer space). The number of failures detected by the IP re. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout /stats/l3/route Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: 3 ipRoutesHighWater: 3 ipRoutesMax: 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP Route statistics: SP ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax --.------------.------------------. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157 .0. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries. The maximum number of seconds. whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch).2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid.Alteon OS 22. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).------------1 3 3 4096 2 3 3 4096 3 3 3 4096 4 3 3 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored: 0 ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered: 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.

The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped.2 Command Reference Table 5-17 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics Route Statistics & SP Route Statistics: ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts ripDiscardPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received. The total number of failed sessions. The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out. The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. The total number of BGP packets dropped. The maximum number of supported routes. The total number of current BGP routes. Description ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored The total number of BGP packets received. The total number of routes dropped by the filter. The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. January 2005 .0. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table. The total number of BGP packets sent.Alteon OS 22. The total number of routes that were added to the routing table. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. bgpRoutesFiltered 158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159 .0. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. When virtual routers are configured.Alteon OS 22. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN.--------------1 1 1 8192 2 1 1 8192 3 1 1 8192 4 1 1 8192 Table 5-18 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. If the master fails. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. based on a number of priority criteria.--------------------. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) 315393-J. MP ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 2 arpEntriesHighWater: 2 arpEntriesMax: 8192 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP ARP statistics: SP arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax --.--------------.

0.2 Command Reference The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword: 0 0 0 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval: 0 0 0 0 Table 5-19 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped.Alteon OS 22. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. 160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . /stats/l3/dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 5-20 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns) Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.

0. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.Alteon OS 22. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. stop sending data) messages received. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161 . icmpInErrors icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks 315393-J. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. bad length. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. and so forth).

The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps 162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. For a host. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. since hosts do not send redirects. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.0. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. stop sending data) messages sent. this object will always be zero. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.2 Command Reference Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs Description The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.

including framing characters. The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.0. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing. For packet-oriented interfaces. This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts.Alteon OS 22. which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163 . this counter will always be 0. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. The number of packets. The number of packets. ifInUcastPkts ifInNUCastPkts ifInDiscards ifInErrors ifInUnknownProtos 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/if <interface number> Interface Statistics IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1 Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInOctets Description The total number of octets received on the interface. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). For packet-oriented interfaces. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

For packet-oriented interfaces. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted.Alteon OS 22. The number of outbound packets. including framing characters. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. including those that were discarded or not sent.2 Command Reference Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifOutOctets Description The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. including those that were discarded or not sent. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. January 2005 . The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down. ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifStateChanges 164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0. and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts.

measured in milliseconds. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. measured in milliseconds. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165 . this object should contain the value -1.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpCurInConn: tcpCurLstnConn: tcpAllocTCBFails: 4 240000 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: tcpCurOutConn: tcpOutRsts: 0 1600 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets.Alteon OS 22. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. In particular. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens 315393-J. an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). In particular. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.0.

The total number of switch-originated TCP connection requests. January 2005 . This count includes segments received on currently established connections. The total number of TCP ports on which the switch is listening.that is. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. The total number of segments received.2 Command Reference Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpAttemptFails Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. including those received in error. The total number of segments sent. The total number of remotely-initiated TCP connections.Alteon OS 22. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of segments retransmitted . The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. bad TCP checksums).0. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. The total number of segments received in error (for example. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpCurInConn tcpCurOutConn tcpCurLstnConn tcpOutRsts tcpAllocTCBFails 166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

2 Command Reference /stats/l3/udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 5-24 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.0. The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.Dump all SLB statistics 315393-J.Show WAP SLB stats maint .Show Layer 7 stats ssl .Show auxiliary session table stats dump .Show SSL SLB stats ftp .Show real server stats group .Show DNS SLB stats wap . udpNoPorts /stats/slb Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp .Show virtual server stats filt .Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp . The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).Show SIP SLB stats clear .Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux .Global SLB Stats Menu real .Show filter stats layer7 .Show maintenance stats sip .Alteon OS 22.Show RTSP SLB stats dns . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167 .SLB Switch SP Stats Menu gslb .Show real server group stats virt . The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.

See page 180 for sample output. For more information. See page 182 for sample output. See page 186 for sample output. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. See page 181 for sample output. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 179 for sample output. 168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used.0. See page 181 for sample output. see page 170. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. Real server transmit/receive octets. To view menu options. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics.Alteon OS 22. see page 179. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. see page 179. rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. For per-service octet counters. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics. For per-service octet counters. See page 187 for sample output. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu. group <real server group number (1-256)> Displays the following real server group statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. Real server transmit/receive octets. See page 190 for sample output. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics menu. ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. see page 174.

Alteon OS 22. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. resetting them to zero. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. See page 196 for sample output. refer to Table 5-48 on page 196. To view the statistics reset by this command. dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics. aux Displays auxiliary session table statistics. 315393-J.0. To save dump data to a file. clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Alteon Application Switch. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions). See page 191 for sample output. See page 192 for sample output. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 169 . Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. sip Displays SIP SLB statistics.2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. All related SNMP counters. See page 194 for sample output.

Alteon OS 22. clear Deletes all the SP statistics.Show filter stats maint .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real . virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server. aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table. See page 172 for a sample output.Show maintenance stats aux . See page 171 for a sample output. maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics. /stats/slb/sp/real <real server number> SP Real Server Statistics Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24 170 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0.Show auxiliary session table stats clear .Show virtual server stats filt .Clear SP stats Table 5-26 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port. See page 171 for a sample output. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port. See page 171 for a sample output. See page 170 for a sample output. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter.Show real server stats group .Show real server group stats virt .

14 20 60 9 2 200.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number> SP Real Group Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.10.100.100.15 20 77 12 ---.100.10.15 20 77 12 ---.-------1 200.--------------. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 171 .--------------.10.---------.100.-------200.10.-------.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number> SP Virtual Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.14 20 60 9 2 200.---------.10.0.--------------.Alteon OS 22.--------------.---------.100 40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number> SP Filter Statistics SP 1 Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 2 315393-J.-------.100.---------.-------.-------1 200.-------.

Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint SP Maintenance Statistics SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 524276 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Terminated Sessions Allocation Failures UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs 172 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on.0. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds).

This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 173 .) 3. They matched an active filter with the deny action set. Free service pool entries 315393-J. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. When there are no available session entries.This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has sions processed so far. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because of one of the following reasons: 1. 2. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. IP fragment table full This counter indicates how many times session table is full. There are no real servers (in the case of redirection filters.Alteon OS 22. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online. Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards This represents the current number of fragment sessions.0. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment ses. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.2 Command Reference Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured.

see page 177. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the rule. January 2005 . To view an example. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the remote site. To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.Show all Global SLB stats Table 5-28 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch. see page 176. 174 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. under which the remote server is configured. site <remote site.Show Global SLB maintenance stats clear .Show Global SLB rule stats geo . network <network.Show Global SLB geographical preference stats maint . dump Displays all Global SLB statistics.Clear all Global SLB stats dump . geo Displays Global SLB statistics for the geographical preference. see page 175. see page 175.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb Global SLB Statistics Menu [Global SLB Statistics Menu] real .Show Global SLB virtual server stats site .Alteon OS 22.Show Global SLB remote site stats network .0. clear Deletes all Global SLB statistics.Show Global SLB network preference stats rule . maint To view an example and description of Global SLB maintenance statistics. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the network. rule <rule.Show Global SLB remote real server stats virt .

the number represents the real server ID on this switch.com Server IP address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects -----.-------------v1 200.----------.--------------.example.200.10 5 0 0 -----. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties).--------------.1 0 0 r2 200. the following statistics can be viewed: Number of DNS responses directed to the remote real server Number of HTTP redirects to the remote real server /stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics Global SLB virtual server 1 http service stats: Domain: www.Alteon OS 22.200. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 175 . The number of DNS responses that return the IP address of the corresponding server.-------------Totals 0 0 Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field Server Description Type of server configuration and server ID number.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number> Real Server Global SLB Statistics Real server 1 global stats: DNS directs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12 For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing. under which the remote server is configured.----------.gslb.200.---.0. 315393-J. v# represents a local virtual server number r# represents a remote site.---. IP Address Site DNS directs IP address of the server.200. The remote site number.

The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 2.2 Command Reference Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field HTTP redirects Description The number of HTTP requests redirected to the corresponding server. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 1. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 1.0. January 2005 . /stats/slb/gslb/site Global SLB Site Statistics Global SLB remote site 1 stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: 386 0 0 768 348 Table 5-30 Global SLB Site Statistics Parameters (/stats/slb/gslb/site) Field Bad remote site packets received DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received Description The number of bad packets received from remote site. 176 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 2.Alteon OS 22.

Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a configuration problem at local or remote GSLB switches.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/maint Global SLB Maintenance Statistics Global SLB maintenance stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: DNS queries received: Bad DNS queries received: DNS responses sent: HTTP requests received: Bad HTTP requests received: HTTP responses sent: Hostname domain hits: Network domain hits: Basic domain hits: No server selected for hostname domain: No server selected for network domain: No server selected for basic domain: No matching domain: Last no result domain: Last source IP: 0 0 0 127746 85164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0.0 Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field Bad remote site packets received Description The number of bad packets received from the remote site.0. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets received from the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets sent to the remote sites.Alteon OS 22.0. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets sent to the remote sites. If bad updates or dropped packets occur. DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received 315393-J. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets received from the remote sites. check your syslog for configuration error messages. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 177 .

domain name.0. The source IP address of the last DNS query or HTTP request received. The number of times no server was selected after matching the host name domain. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the network domain name configured.Alteon OS 22. The number of bad DNS queries received. HTTP requests received The number of HTTP requests received. Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. The domain in the last DNS query received that did not match the host name. domain name. or the network domain configured. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the basic domain name configured. The number of HTTP responses sent by the switch that includes HTTP redirects. HTTP responses sent Hostname domain hits Network domain hits Basic domain hits No server selected for hostname domain No server selected for network domain No server selected for basic domain No matching domain Last no result domain Last source IP 178 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the hostname configured. or the network domain configured. Bad HTTP requests received The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests. The number of times no server was selected after matching the network domain name.2 Command Reference Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field DNS queries received Bad DNS queries received DNS responses sent Description The number of DNS queries received. January 2005 . The number of times no server was selected after matching the basic domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received did not match the host name. The number of DNS responses sent by the switch that includes DNS directs and DNS error responses.

315393-J. Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Per Service Octet Counters For each load-balanced real server. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 179 . you can configure IP address 10. and 10. you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1.1. unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. The octet counters are provided per server–not per service.1. Table 5-32 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real) Statistics Current sessions Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server.1. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server. These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server.1. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/real <real server number> Real Server SLB Statistics Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000 NOTE – Octets are provided per server.Alteon OS 22.20 for HTTP services.0. the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets). not per service.21 for FTP services on the same physical server. For instance. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server. If you need octet counters on a perservice basis.

3.Alteon OS 22. 180 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.--------------. 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 Real server group statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server.0. On the Alteon Application Switch. Continuing the example above. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. Real server transmit/receive octets.-------.---------. two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP.--------------.14 20 60 9 2 200. For per-service octet counters. two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service).100.2 Command Reference 2.-------. January 2005 . On the Alteon Application Switch. in keeping with our example.100.15 20 77 12 ---. configure one real server group for each type of service. configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above. Thus.10. and five for the FTP services on each physical server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group.---------. 4. /stats/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.10. and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service. If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP).-------1 200.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 181 .-------.10. Real server transmit/receive octets.100.10.15 20 77 12 ---.20 40 309 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line. /stats/slb/filt <filter number> Filter SLB Statistics Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011 You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been matched.100.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.---------. Virtual server statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server.-------200. below the real server IP addresses. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server.10.--------------.14 20 60 9 2 200.0.Alteon OS 22.--------------. For per-service octet counters. 315393-J.-------1 200.-------. see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179.100.---------. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.

Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats Table 5-33 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7) Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics. 182 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. See page 182 for a sample output.Alteon OS 22.The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server. See page 183 for a sample output.0. Total straight to ori. Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server. See page 184 for a sample output.Show SLB String stats maint .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu [Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir . maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics. /stats/slb/layer7/redir Layer7 Redirection Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: 'Cookie: ' hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server. Total none-GETs hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server. January 2005 . str Displays SLB string statistics.Show URL Redirection stats str .

abc.org 7 www.com 5 www. /stats/slb/layer7/str Layer 7 SLB String Statistics SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www.com 6 www. 315393-J. The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter.2 Command Reference Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Total 'Cookie:' hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits Description The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server.Alteon OS 22.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 183 .0.[abcdefjhijklm]*. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.com 4 www.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-35 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str) Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching.[abcdefghijklm]*. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server.junk. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server.com 3 www.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7/maint Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1. The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1.1 184 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails .Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0 1260 1260 1260 1260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination. the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection.0 Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.Alteon OS 22.1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 9000 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Out of order packet drops: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5040 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails . The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding. January 2005 . This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding.1 client requests.0.

The number of outstanding sequence buffers used. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 185 .2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations. The total number of sequence buffer allocated.Alteon OS 22. The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes.0. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low. The total number of TCP packets dropped because they were received out of order.2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Invalid HTTP methods Description The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used. Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Out of order packet drops: Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees 315393-J. The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened. The total number of sequence buffer is freed. The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size. The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server. The number of outstanding data buffers used. The currently available SP memory units.

Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The total number of buffers allocated to store client request.0.Seq buffers Alloc Fails .2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees Alloc Fails .-------. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain. The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table.-------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0 Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Total number of SSL ID reassignments Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence.2 The total of number buffers freed. Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session. Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session. The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed.Alteon OS 22.---------. /stats/slb/ssl SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: Total number of SSL ID reassignments: 0 0 Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------. 186 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed. January 2005 .

Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats Table 5-38 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp) Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. The number of different TCP connections using SSL service. dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. SSL connections Persistent Port Sessions /stats/slb/ftp File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu [FTP SLB parsing and active . 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics Description The table shows the Current Sessions. This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch.0.Show maint . these should all bind to the same server.Alteon OS 22. the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId. maint Shows maintenance statistics. See page 188 for sample output.Show parsing . See page 189.Show dump . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 187 . parsing Shows parsing statistics. See page 188 for sample output. The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports. See page 189 for sample output.

The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections.Alteon OS 22. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff 188 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. /stats/slb/ftp/parsing Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-40 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing) Statistics Total FTP Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections.0. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing. January 2005 . The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/active Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-39 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client.

Alteon OS 22. /stats/slb/ftp/dump FTP SLB Statistics Dump Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-42 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump) Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa. The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/maint FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics FTP mode switch error: 0 Table 5-41 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint) Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 189 .0. 315393-J. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode.

-------0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-43 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp) Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection.---------. Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures 190 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.---------. The total number of buffer allocations used.---------.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/rtsp RTSP SLB Statistics Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -. The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.---------. January 2005 . The total number of UDP connections for data channels. The total number of times the connection got redirected.---------.---------. The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down.---------.---------.0.---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -.---------.---------. The number depends upon the type of media player being used.

The total number of malformed DNS queries received. Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors 315393-J.0. The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved. The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 191 .Alteon OS 22. Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/dns DNS SLB Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-44 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns) Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections. The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved. The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query.

DMA: 0 Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures The number of session bindings currently in use. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.0. WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/wap WAP SLB Statistics This command displays all the Radius and WAP related counters. 192 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured.SP dead: 0 req fails.SP dead: 0 req fails. incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports no available real server requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure.2 Command Reference Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs req fails. The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP. RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 193 .SP dead req fails.DMA 315393-J. The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received.0.SP dead The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received.

Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds).2 Command Reference /stats/slb/maint SLB Maintenance Statistics SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: Free Service pool entries: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8192 SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table. Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. 194 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0. UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. January 2005 . Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 195 . but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header.0. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. This counter indicates how many times session table is full.2 Command Reference Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. 315393-J. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full Free service pool entries This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far.

Total number of SIP Total number of packets received with methods not known to the Unknown Method packets SIP parser on the switch. Total number of SIP Incomplete Messages Total number of packets received which do not have the complete SIP message in a single packet. The total number of errors encountered during server processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet.Alteon OS 22. /stats/slb/clear Clearing the SLB Statistics The following statistics are reset to zero when the clear command is given and confirmed: Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server stats: Description Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Real server group stats: Virtual server stats 196 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sip SIP SLB Statistics SIP Stats: Total number Total number Total number Total number of of of of SIP SIP SIP SIP Client Parse Errors Server Parse Errors Unknown Method packets Incomplete Messages : : : : 0 0 0 0 Table 5-47 SIP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/sip) Statistics Total number of SIP Client Parse Errors Total number of SIP Server Parse Errors Description The total number of errors encountered during client processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet.

0. per port Description Total firings Real server stats: Octets. Total sessions Total firings: Octets Per real server: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Per server group: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Redir: Total cache server hits Total origin server hits Total none-GETs hits Total 'Cookie: ' hits Total no-cache hits LB: ID SLB String hits Total Sessions Highest Sessions Total FTP Total FTP NAT Filtered Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Global SLB stats URL SLB and Redirection stats SSL SLB stats FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats Real server stats Real server group stats Virtual server stats 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 197 . Total sessions Virtual server: Octets.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Filter stats SLB switch port stats. Total sessions Real server group: Octets.

See page 204 for sample output.BW History stats maint .Alteon OS 22. See page 203 for sample output. hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics.Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont . maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics.BW Contract rate stats hist .Dump all BWM statistics clear .Show BWM IP user stats for iplimit contracts dump . See page 200 for details. dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics. Each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/contract on page 281.Show BWM maint statistics ipusers . See page 201 for details.Clear BWM statistics Table 5-49 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.0. clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics. January 2005 . 198 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. To view menu options. see page 199. cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. ipusers Displays Bandwidth Management IP user stats for iplimit contracts.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu [Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port .BW Contract stats rcont . See page 204 for sample output.

BW Contract stats rcont . For example: >> AAS_2424 . rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.-----1 cont1 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 674252832 1798583472 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 772710 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen.---------.--------------. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 199 . You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>.------.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300. See page 199 for a sample output.BW Contract rate stats Table 5-50 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session.Alteon OS 22. /stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 .---------. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/port <port number> BWM Switch Processor Statistics [Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont .0. zero for infinite 315393-J.

-----1 cont1 223868832 568900584 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 224149728 568632456 16384 456960 25 cont25 0 0 0 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 401270 0 0 456960 The following description of statistics applies on a specific switch port for all enabled contracts.0.------. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.--------------.----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/cont <contract number> BWM Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.------.---------. The contract name.Alteon OS 22.---------. January 2005 . NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only. Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics Contract Name Octets Description The contract number.--------------. Discards 200 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------.---------.---------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.

For example: >> AAS_2424 . Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.Alteon OS 22. BufMax /stats/bwm/rcont BWM Contract Rate Statistics Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 .2 Command Reference Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics BufUsed Description The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 201 . The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied. zero for infinite 315393-J. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only. This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen.

----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960 Table 5-52 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Description The contract number. Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax 202 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------.0.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. The contract name. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.---------. January 2005 .------.---------. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.Alteon OS 22. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.--------------.

23.Alteon OS 22. Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 203 .23. Table 5-53 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist) Statistics Contract Octets Discards Description The contract number for which history is enabled.23.23. TimeStamp 315393-J.---------.23. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract.80.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.23.124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------------.80.80. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------.80.---------47. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals.0.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/hist BWM History Statistics Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------.80.80.80.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.---.80.124 256 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent.23.

---------.---------0 20 0 0 20 204 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/maint BWM Maintenance Statistics BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 0 Out octets 0 Transmit failed 0 User Limit entry allocation failures 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0 /stats/bwm/ipusers BWM IP Users Statistics This command displays the number of BWM IP user entries for each BWM contract for each SP.---------.---------.---------.---------.Alteon OS 22.---------.0. BWM IP users statistics Contract SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 Total -------. January 2005 .---------10 0 10 0 0 10 11 0 10 0 0 10 ---------.---------.

0. sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use. mem Displays memory statistics. and 64 seconds.Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd . cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1. see page 208.Show memory stats Table 5-54 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Alteon OS 22. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. see page 206.Show All Socket FD in use cpu . 315393-J. 4. To view a sample output.Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 209. see page 208. To view a sample output. see page 209.Show Packet and TCP stats tcb .2 Command Reference /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics [MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt . ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use.Show CPU utilization mem . to check for leads and load. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 205 .

The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.Alteon OS 22. Description frees mediums jumbos smalls alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0 Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Packet counts: allocs Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. 206 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

2 Command Reference Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics packet discards Description The number of packets that are discarded by the MP. current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards 315393-J. TCP counts: allocs Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available. The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 207 .0.Alteon OS 22. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded. Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

January 2005 .0.16.80.80.81.81.0/47.59 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen Table 5-57 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb) Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State 208 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.27.6 1331 <=> 47.0.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 117f6d00: 0.0/47.16.0 117f81a8: 47.0.0 0 <=> 0.6 0/1331 0.0.0.27.0.0.0.0.59 80 23 listen established Table 5-56 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics 117f6d00/117f81a8 0.

88.0 server 0 <=> 47.0.0.0.0 server 1 -1 17 108c5bd8: 0.133.88.0. cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.31 81 23 22 443 listen listen listen listen TCP TCP TCP TCP /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on MP.0.0. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.88.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/sfd MP-Specific SFD Statistics All Socket FD allocated: 0 -1 16 1180b128: 0.0.133.88. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval.31 0 <=> 47.0 server 3 -1 19 1180a258: 0.0.0 server 2 -1 18 108d5cfc: 0.31 0 <=> 47. CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 100% 100% 100% Table 5-58 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.31 0 <=> 47.0.133. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 209 .133.

Show CPU utilization Table 5-59 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp) Statistics maint Description Displays internal statistics. Layer 2 FDB maintenance statistics. See page 211 for a sample output. January 2005 .0. Deletes all the maintenance statistics. and MP DOS shield statistics.Show maintenance stats clear . clear cpu 210 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics [SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint . Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized. see page 211. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Clear maintenance stats cpu .Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP number>/maint SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 158648 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 125516 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 6799 Send Letter success to SP 4: 6791 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards: 0 0 0 0 /stats/sp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on the Switch Processor (SP). CPU utilization for SP 1: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 6% 6% 6% Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 211 .0.

0. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.Alteon OS 22. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval. January 2005 .UDP Blast Statistics Menu pgroup . udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. cpuUtil64Seconds /stats/security Security Statistics [Security Statistics Menu] dos .2 Command Reference Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil4Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. see page 214. see page 216. pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu.Show pattern match group statistics ratelim . 212 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.DoS Attack Statistics Menu ipacl .IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast . see page 213. see page 216.Show rate limiting statistics dump . ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu. ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu. see page 215.Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.

Clear all DoS attack statistics help . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 213 .2 Command Reference Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all security statistics. clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics.DoS attack statistics description Table 5-61 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks. help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works. see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 214.Port DoS attack statistics dump . dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch. Xmascan. Fraggle.Dump all DoS attack statistics clear . LandAttack. for each of the following types of DOS attacks: Smurf. 315393-J.0. Blat For a description of these different types of DOS attacks.Alteon OS 22. PortZero. Nullscan. ScanSynFin. on the selected port only. /stats/security/dos DOS Attack Statistics Menu [DoS Attack Statistics Menu] port .

0. 214 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch.x. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros.2 Command Reference Types of DOS Attacks Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. PortZero.255).Alteon OS 22.255). and ScanSynFin. LandAttack.IP address access control Stats clear .x. >> /stats/security/dos help Smurf: The ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP(x. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. /stats/security/ipacl IP Access Control List Statistics The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command: [IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump . LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal destination IP. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks. January 2005 . ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet. URG and PSH bits are set. Fraggle. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets.x. Fraggle: The UDP packet to a broadcast destination IP(x. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets with either source/destination port is zero. Nullscan. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN.x.Clear all access control Stats Table 5-62 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each IP address and mask pair. Xmascan.

clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets. The number of blocked packets.0. Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port. 315393-J. and the current packet rate per second. See page 215 for a sample output and a description of the statistics.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 215 .UDP Blast Stats clear .Clear all UDP Blast Stats Table 5-63 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port.2 Command Reference /stats/security/udpblast UDP Blast Statistics [UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump . /stats/security/udpblast/dump UDP Blast Dump Statistics UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second -------------------------- Table 5-64 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump) Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks.

2 Command Reference /stats/security/pgroup UDP Pattern Match Statistics Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0 This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting. January 2005 .0. 216 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 350. /stats/security/ratelim Rate Limiting Statistics Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-65 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim) Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 217 .0.2 Command Reference /stats/security/dump Dump Statistics for Security IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.

2 Command Reference /stats/snmp SNMP Statistics NOTE – You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command as follows: >> Statistics# snmp clear SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC'tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: snmpSilentDrops: 150097 0 0 150097 0 0 0 2731 131389 0 0 0 1 0 150093 0 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC'tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: snmpProxyDrops: 0 0 0 0 0 0 798464 17593 615 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels: snmpInvalidMsgs: snmpUnknownPDUHandlers: snmpUnknownContexts: snmpUnavailableContexts: usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels: usmStatsNotInTimeWindows: usmStatsUnknownUserNames: usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs: usmStatsWrongDigests: usmStatsDecryptionErrors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInPkts Description The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service.0.Alteon OS 22. 218 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .

1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets. defined in X. The total number of ASN. The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. defined in X. An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch). which contains the value `read-Only' in the error-status field. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInBadVersions Description The total number of SNMP Messages. Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 219 . ASN.209). and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `read-Only'. As such.0. The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. snmpInBadC'tyNames snmpInBadC'tyUses snmpInASNParseErrs snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys 315393-J. this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One.208). The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN. from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences.Alteon OS 22. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.

The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP GetRequest and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr. January 2005 . which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue.0. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs).2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInGenErrs Description The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP SetRequest Protocol Data Units (PDUs).Alteon OS 22. snmpInTotalReqVars snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests 220 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. The total number of MIB objects. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). Not in use.

The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the PDU contained in the packet could not be passed to an application responsible for handling the pduType. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 221 . The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs.0. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a manner such that no Response-PDU could be returned. GetNextRequest-PDUs. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. SetRequest-PDUs. for example. GetNextRequest-PDUs. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate ResponsePDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. SetRequest-PDUs. no SNMP application had registered for the proper combination of the contextEngineID and the pduType.Alteon OS 22. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because there were invalid or inconsistent components in the SNMP message. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpInvalidMsgs snmpUnknownPDUHandlers snmpUnknownContexts snmpUnavailableContexts 315393-J. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops snmpProxyDrops SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a securityModel that was not known to or supported by the SNMP engine. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpOutGetNexts Description The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). GetBulkRequest-PDUs. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unknown. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unavailable.

Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Jul 13. 2004 Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Jul 13. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's window. 2004 222 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. usmStatsNotInTimeWindows usmStatsUnknownUserNames usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs usmStatsWrong Digests usmStatsDecryption Errors /stats/ntp NTP Statistics Alteon OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced an snmpEngineID that was not known to the SNMP engine. With NTP enabled. the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they could not be decrypted.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels Description The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they requested a securityLevel that was unknown to the SNMP engine or otherwise unavailable. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a user that was not known to the SNMP engine. NTP statistics: Primary Server: Requests Sent: 17 Responses Received: 17 Updates: 1 Secondary Server: Requests Sent: 0 Responses Received: 0 Updates: 0 Last update based on response from primary server.0. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they didn't contain the expected digest value.

0. Secondary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time.Alteon OS 22. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server.2 Command Reference Table 5-67 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Primary Server Description Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time. Last update based on response from primary server Last update time Current system time Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP response received. The switch system time when the command /stats/ntp was issued. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 223 . Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. 315393-J. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. NOTE – You can issue /stats/ntp/clear command to delete all statistics. The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated.

2 Command Reference /stats/pm Port Mirroring Statistics Menu [Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump . The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface. and the statistics of the traffic on the ingress and egress ports. January 2005 .0. CAUTION—Use this command carefully as it will delete all statistics permanently. RX packets RX errors 224 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Clear all Port Mirroring Stats Table 5-68 Port Mirroring Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the port number. The number of bad packets received. clear Deletes all the port mirroring statistics.Port Mirroring Stats clear .Alteon OS 22. /stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX bytes Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface.

The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue. 315393-J. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems. If you want to capture dump data to a file.2 Command Reference Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX dropped Description The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers.Alteon OS 22. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue. Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 225 . Not applicable. depending on your configuration). The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface. RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors TX collisions /stats/dump Dump Statistics Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more. The number of multicast packets received. This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.0.

Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference 226 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu.Security Menu setup . display more or different information than in the previous version. see page 231. Important difference are called out in the text. Many of the commands.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security . although not new. To view menu options. January 2005 . viewing.Port Mirroring Menu bwm .System-wide Parameter Menu port . 227 315393-J.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .Restore current configuration from tftp server Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System-wide parameter Configuration Menu.Port Menu pmirr . To make finding information easier. and saving switch configuration changes. see page 265. the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7.Layer 3 Menu slb .Step by step configuration set up dump . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 .Layer 2 Menu l3 .CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg . To view menu options.

For details. see page 287. see page 348. “The SLB Configuration Menu”. see page 354. security Displays the Security Menu. For details. January 2005 . To view menu options. see page 353.0. To view menu options. and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. To view menu options. To view menu options. For details. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. To view menu options. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. see page 278. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. Viewing. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server. see page 279. ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. Also.Alteon OS 22. see page 354. Applying. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu. setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. the changes you make do not take effect immediately. see Chapter 7. For details.2 Command Reference Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. see page 299. While configuration changes are in the pending state. see page 353. To view menu options. you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory 228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

save them (see below). To apply configuration changes.Alteon OS 22. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. you must apply them. To turn STP on or off. except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save 315393-J. you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied. Therefore. and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 448). Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. you must apply the changes. To save the new configuration. Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. NOTE – The diff command is a global command. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229 .2 Command Reference Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. you can save them to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch. # apply NOTE – The apply command is a global command.0. NOTE – If you do not save the changes. Therefore.

enter the following instead: # save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch.2 Command Reference When you save configuration changes. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. 230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. the changes are saved to the active configuration block. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset.0. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block. January 2005 .

and management access list. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231 . sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu. Web-based management settings. To view menu options. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. see page 240. To view menu options. see page 237. To view menu options. 315393-J.0. To view menu options. see page 234. see page 233. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords. mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. tacacs Displays TACACS+ authentication Menu. see page 239.

bannr <string. see page 258. This command is disabled by default. access Displays System Access Menu. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. To view menu options. affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions.2 Command Reference Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. To view menu options. sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. To view menu options. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). see page 243. To view menu options. see page 244. the login banner is displayed. health Displays system health check menu. If you enable BOOTP. date Prompts the user for the system date. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. To view menu options. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. see page 259. January 2005 . ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. idle <idle timeout in minutes. When a user or administrator logs into the switch.0.Alteon OS 22. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. cur Displays the current system parameters. from 1 to 10080 minutes. The default is 5 minutes. see page 242. 232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

or enable/disable syslog on all available features. It is enabled by default. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. The default is 7.17. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233 .17. host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console.4. 192. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host. The default is 7. which means log all the seven severity levels.0. The default is 0. log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. 315393-J. which means. When necessary.4. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. log all the seven severity levels. filter). sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 0.Alteon OS 22. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as. gslb. see page 234. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans. 192. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. cur Displays the current syslog settings. see page 234.223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host.

SNMP. This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. This means that the system is unusable. or in some cases. If this port is enabled. and must be enabled before it can be used. 7. 3: Error. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages. the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management using the console). You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port. /cfg/sys/mmgmt Management Port Configuration Menu The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch. The Management port must be configured with a static IP address. 1: Alert. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions. 4: Warning. January 2005 . the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports. While the switch can be managed from any network port. subnet mask. 2: Critical. This means that the system is giving a warning.0. the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. 234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Seven Levels of Severity Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. This means the condition of the system is critical.Alteon OS 22. 5: Notice. This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI. If this port is disabled. broadcast address. and default gateway. This means that corrective action must be taken immediately. or HTTP. by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis. 6: Informational. Debug.

addr <IP address (such as.Set default port for NTP radius .255. 315393-J.255.Set IP address mask .2 Command Reference NOTE – The Management port does not support BOOTP.101)> Sets the IP address.Set default port for DNS ntp .Set default port for TFTP ena . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235 .Set default port for TACACS+ smtp . mask <subnet mask (such as. [Management Port Menu] port .Set default gateway address intr .Set subnet mask gw .4.Management Port Phy Menu addr . 192. see page 237.0.Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry .Display current configuration Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu. dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port.4.Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp .Alteon OS 22.60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts. 255.Set default port for SNMP traps syslog . intr <interval (0 .Set default port for SMTP snmp .1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway.Set default port for RADIUS tacacs .0)> Sets the subnet mask.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns .17.Disable management port cur . gw <gateway address (such as.Enable management port dis . 192.17.Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp . To view the menu options. Default is data port. retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN.

When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. ena Enables the Management port. cur Displays the current configuration. sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. Default is data port. tacacs mgmt|data Sets TACACS+ over management or data ports. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port. Default is data port.2 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports. Default is data port. then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. The default is data port. 236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports. Default is data port. radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports. Default is data port. dis Disables the Management port.0. Default is data port. But if it is set to data.

SSH uses RSA public key cryptography for both connection and authentication. By default this command is turned on. rlogin.Set full or half duplex mode auto .slogin.Display current link configuration Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port. SSH is actually a suite of three utilities .Set autonegotiation cur . ssh. SSH commands are encrypted and secure in several ways. sometimes known as Secure Socket Shell.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/mmgmt/port Management Port Link Menu [Management Port Link Menu] speed . Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate. mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode.Set link speed mode . and rcp.0. It is widely used by network administrators to control Web and other kinds of servers remotely. Default is any. 315393-J. cur Displays the current link configuration. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237 . and passwords are protected by being encrypted. /cfg/sys/sshd SSH Server Configuration Menu Secure Shell (SSH).that are secure versions of the earlier UNIX utilities.Alteon OS 22. auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port. Default is any. and scp . rsh. is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol for securely getting access to a remote computer.

scpadm Sets the Secure Copy (SCP)-only admin password. 238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current SSH server configuration.Alteon OS 22. skeygen Generates the RSA server key. hkeygen Generates the RSA host key. When you enter this command. RSA server key generation starts immediately. RSA host key generation starts immediately. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 353). sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number. Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <interval (0-24)> Sets the interval for generating the RSA server key. this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client.2 Command Reference [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration NOTE – For the Alteon Application Switch. dis Disables SCP. January 2005 . When you enter this command.0. ena Enables SCP. on Enables the SSH server.

3000. The default is 1645. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time. retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239 . secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address. The default is 3 seconds.Display current RADIUS configuration Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address.Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur .Set RADIUS server retries timeout . secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the secondary RADIUS server(s).Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on . default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. in seconds. The default is 3 requests. between 1500 .Set secondary RADIUS server secret port .Set RADIUS server timeout telnet . 315393-J.Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .Turn RADIUS authentication ON off . port <RADIUS port to configure. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the primary RADIUS server(s).Set RADIUS port retries . before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed.Set primary RADIUS server secret secret2 .Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference NOTE – The top four commands are only accessible at the serial port /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv .

TACACS is an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. It supports full-packet encryption as against password-only in authentication requests. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in Request for Comments 1492.Alteon OS 22. on Enables the RADIUS server.2 Command Reference Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet. Also. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. 240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic. /cfg/sys/tacacs TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile. off Disables the RADIUS server. and accounting.) TACACS+ protocol is seen as more reliable than RADIUS as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). TACACS+ protocol has been implemented on Alteon OS to support the customers that have Cisco’s TACACS+ protocol as their network security feature. whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations.0. Supports decoupled authentication. January 2005 . Apart from that. authorization.

The default is 3 requests. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds. before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. default 1645> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured. between 1500 . Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections.2 Command Reference [TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv secret secret2 port retries timeout telnet on off cur - Menu] Set primary TACACS+ server address Set secondary TACACS+ server address Set primary TACACS+ server secret Set secondary TACACS+ server secret Set TACACS+ TCP port Set TACACS+ server retries Set TACACS+ server timeout (seconds) Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet Turn TACACS+ authentication ON Turn TACACS+ authentication OFF Display current TACACS+ configuration Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. The default is 1645. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet. on Enables the TACACS+ server.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241 . 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. in seconds. retries <RADIUS server retries. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the primary TACACS+ server(s). 1-10> Sets the amount of time. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address. The default is 3 seconds.Alteon OS 22.3000. port <RADIUS port configure. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the secondary TACACS+ server(s). 315393-J.

2 Command Reference Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the TACACS+ server. January 2005 . this option is disabled.Set NTP timezone offset from GMT dlight .Display current NTP configuration Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <primary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. This interval of time will be specified in minutes (1-44640).Turn NTP service OFF cur .Turn NTP service ON off .Set primary NTP server address secsrv .Alteon OS 22. intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies how often the switch will re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset.Set NTP server resync interval tzone . The default value is 1440 minutes. cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters. of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).0. tzone <offset from GMT. /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. secsrv <secondary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. [NTP Server Menu] prisrv . 242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. in hours and minutes.Enable/Disable daylight savings time on .Set secondary NTP server address intrval . By default.

By default. If the interface specified by this command is not up. on Enables the NTP synchronization service. on This command enables the SONMP protocol.Alteon OS 22. When enabled. cur Displays the current NTP service settings. the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. this option is disabled. 315393-J.0. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets. The topology algorithm is executed by each Alteon switch on which SONMP is enabled. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243 . /cfg/sys/sonmp SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration [SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Alteon Application Switches on the network.2 Command Reference Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage dlight disable|enable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology algorithm and the Bay Topology MIB. and turns Ethernet Autotopology on.

Alteon OS 22.0. /cfg/sys/ssnmp System SNMP Configuration Alteon OS supports SNMP-based network management. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify.2 Command Reference Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage off This command disables the SONMP protocol. January 2005 . cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration. If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network. you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages. In SNMP model of network management. and turns Ethernet Autotopology off. SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings 244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent).

This command enables the user to select one of the configured interfaces as the source interface using the interface number. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string.Set SNMP trap source interface timeout .Set SNMP "sysName" locn .Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont .0. The default write community string is private. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245 . It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. trsrc <interface number (1-256)> Defines the interface number for SNMP trap source interface. cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact. The default read community string is public. 315393-J.Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt .Set SNMP read community string wcomm . see page 247.SNMPv3 Menu name . The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters. NOTE – This command is applicable only to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 traps because only the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap packets contain the source IP address that can be set with this command. locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location. The SNMPv3 packets do not contain this field.Display current system SNMP configuration Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu. name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system.2 Command Reference [System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 .Set SNMP write community string trsrc . The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch.Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur . It can have a maximum of 32 characters.Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth .Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm .

2 Command Reference Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes. linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. 246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. The default setting is enabled. memory is allocated to store the output of the command. January 2005 . auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine. The default setting is disabled. When you use diff and apply. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed.

2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. see page 251.0. [SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur - usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> This command allows you to create different MIB views. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247 . You can also configure this entry through SNMP. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> This command allows you to specify access rights. To view menu options. To view menu options. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. see page 250. see page 249. 315393-J.

and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> This command allows you to configure destination information. security level.0. see page 255. see page 254. 248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. see page 253. tparam <target params index [1-16]> This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters. January 2005 . There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters. consisting of message processing model. consisting of a transport domain and a transport address. To view menu options. security model. This is also termed as transport endpoint. and security name information. v1v2 disable|enable This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. see page 257. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. see page 256. comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters. To view menu options. This command is enabled by default. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions.2 Command Reference Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]> A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests. To view menu options. To view menu options. cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options.

auth md5|sha|none This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. you need to provide a password. [SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user.0. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm User Security Model Configuration Menu You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. you will get an error message. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. privpw This command allows you to create or change the privacy password. 315393-J. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication. authpw If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command. If you specify des as the privacy protocol. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249 . If you select none as the authentication protocol. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. otherwise you will get an error message during validation.Alteon OS 22. The default algorithm is none. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. priv des|none This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch.

Set view name tree . type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees. which is included in or excluded from the MIB view. cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name .6. January 2005 .Set view type del .3. which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees. cur Displays the USM user entries. mask <bitmask.0. del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry.0. max size 32 characters> This command defines the bit mask. which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees.1.1. a string of maximum 32 characters. 1.1.Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration Table 6-14 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters. such as. max 32 characters> This command defines MIB tree. cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.Alteon OS 22.Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur .2 Command Reference Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the USM user entries.1.2. tree <object identifier.Set view mask type .. 250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask .

The view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by contextName. For more information on naming the management information.Set security model level .0. [SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name .Set read view index wview .Set content prefix model . An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.Set group name prefix . The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. see RFC2571. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251 . An SNMP entity has access to many contexts. Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol.Set prefix only or exact match rview . The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. 315393-J. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights.Display current vacmAccess configuration Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines the name of the group.Delete vacmAccess entry cur .Set notify view index del . the SNMP Architecture document. prefix <32 character name> Defines the name of the context. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used.Alteon OS 22.Set write view index nview .Set minimum level of security match .

then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected. wview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage match exact|prefix If the value is set to exact. nview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are selected. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. rview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. 252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry.

del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry.Set security model uname . cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration. uname <32 character name> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249.Set USM user name gname .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model .0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253 .Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration Table 6-16 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group) Command Syntax and Usage model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model.Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur . 315393-J. gname <32 character name> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 251.Set group gname del .

This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine. 254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Delete communityTable entry cur .Set community string uname .Display current communityTable configuration Table 6-17 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/comm) Command Syntax and Usage index <32 character name> Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum.0.Set USM user name tag . This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. January 2005 . del Deletes the community table entry. [SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index .Set community index name . cur Displays the community table configuration. name <32 character name> Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249.Alteon OS 22. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu This command is used for configuring the community table entry. tag <list of tag string. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine.Set community tag del . uname <32 character name> Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model.

del Deletes the Target Address Table entry.Set target transport address IP port .Set target address name addr .Set targetParams name del . 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.Delete targetAddrTable entry cur . max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation. cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration. port <transport address port> Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. addr <transport address ip> Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.Display current targetAddrTable configuration Table 6-18 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. [SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name .Set target transport address port taglist . target address name associated with this entry.Set tag list pname . The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine. taglist <list of tag string.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu This command is used to configure the target transport entry.0. pname <32 character name> Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name on page 256. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255 . but unique identifier.

or authPriv). level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry. SNMPv1). uname <32 character name> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 249) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry. mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3 Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages. the security model (for example: USM).Set USM user name level . model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages. authNoPriv. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. but unique identifier that is associated with this entry.Display current targetParamsTable configuration Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. and the security level (noAuthnoPriv. the security name. [SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name .Delete targetParamsTable entry cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine.Alteon OS 22.Set target params name mpmodel . 256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.Set security model uname .Set message processing model model . January 2005 .0.Set minimum level of security del . The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. SNMPv2c. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3.

A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. is selected. cur Displays the current notify table configuration. that matches the value of this tag. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257 . /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. del Deletes the notify table entry.Delete notifyTable entry cur .0.Display current notifyTable configuration Table 6-20 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry. 315393-J. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable. [SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name . tag <list of tag string.Set notify tag del . max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration.Set notify name tag .2 Command Reference Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry.

off Turns off the TCP health check services. Specify a TCP service port number.Add TCP services to listen for health check rem . Specify a TCP service port number.Turn system TCP health services ON off . rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks.Display current TCP health services configuration Table 6-21 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health) Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks. on Turns on the TCP health check services.Alteon OS 22.Remove TCP services from listening on . 258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. such as 80 for HTTP. such as 80 for HTTP.Turn system TCP health services OFF cur . cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/health System Health Check Configuration Menu [System TCP Health Menu] add .

see page 263. You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port. 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access System Access Control Configuration [System Access Menu] mgmt . see page 260. Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port. To view menu options. or read-write. set this to a different port (such as 8080). January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259 . To view menu options. It is disabled by default. snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled. or UDP packets to MP cur . wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content.Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access wport . read-only. The default is HTTP port 80.Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp .Set Telnet server port number rlimit . tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch. This command is disabled by default. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used.Display current system access configuration Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu.User Access Control Menu (passwords) https . see page 261. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface. TCP.Management Network Definition Menu user . ICMP.Alteon OS 22. tnport <TCP port number> The TCP port number that the telnet server listens for telnet sessions.0.Set SNMP access control tnet .Enable/disable Telnet access tnport .Set max rate of ARP.HTTPS (Web) Server Access Menu http . https Displays HTTPS Server Access Menu. To view menu options. user Displays the User Access Control Menu.

cur Displays the current configuration.Alteon OS 22. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address.Display current mgmt network definitions Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet. NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces. SNMP.0. NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS.2 Command Reference Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate. TCP.Add mgmt network definition rem . /cfg/sys/access/mgmt Management Networks Menu This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. or the Alteon OS browser-based interface. ICMP. it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network. 0-65535 (pkts/sec)> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP. 260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . Then specify the maximum rate. Specify which protocol you wish to limit. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation. which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch. [Management Networks Menu] add . or UDP protocols. RIP.Remove mgmt network definition cur .

To view menu options. Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID. which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. 1-10> Displays the User ID Menu. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads.Alteon OS 22. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. Access includes “user” functions.2 Command Reference Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network.0. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261 . cur Displays the current configuration. He or she can view switch status information and statistics. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. usrpw Sets the user (user) password. but cannot make any configuration changes. see page 264. /cfg/sys/access/user User Access Control Menu uid usrpw sopw l4opw opw sapw l4apw admpw cur User ID Menu Set user password (user) Set SLB operator password (slboper) Set L4 operator password (l4oper) Set operator password (oper) Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) Set administrator password (admin) Display current user status NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters.

including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. information. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. with the exception of not being able to configure filters. The operator manages all functions of the switch.0. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch. Access includes “l4oper” functions. Access includes “slbadmin” functions. Access includes “l4oper” functions.Alteon OS 22. Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. 262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus. Access includes “slboper” functions. cur Displays the current user status. opw Sets the operator (oper)password. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. January 2005 . The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch.2 Command Reference Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. He or she can view all switch information and statistics.

company) []: Nortel Networks Organizational Unit Name (for example.0. or the Web browser.Alteon OS 22. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example. user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. certSave Allows the client. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. 315393-J. Then the switch will restart SSL agent. For example: Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example. email address) []: info@nortelnetworks. section) []: Alteon Common Name (for example.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/https HTTPS Access Configuration Menu [https Menu] https port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 6-25 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage https Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted.com You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263 .

Operator.Enable user ID .Set class of service . 1-1023> Removes a real server access from this user.Set user name . and Administrator. 1-1023> Assigns a real server access to this user. [User ID 1 cos name pswd add rem ena dis del cur Menu] . SLB Administrator.0. ena Enables the user ID.Set user password .Display current user configuration Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|slboper|l4oper|oper|slbadmin|l4admin|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level. and the number of current sessions. You can enable or disable the real servers and change the password for accessing these real servers. pswd <15 char max> Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum. Using this command you can list the current status of the real server including the real server number. add <real server number. Layer 4 Operator. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.Delete user ID . rem <real server number.Add real server . 264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Alteon OS defines these levels as: User. the operational state of the real server. SLB Operator. with User being the most restricted level.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user/uid System User ID Configuration Menu This feature allows the users to operate the real servers assigned to them.Remove real server .Disable user ID . name <8 char max> Defines the user name of maximum eight characters. the real server name. dis Disables the user ID.

2 Command Reference Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the user ID. This command is enabled by default. You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks. The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. SFP GBIC Ports The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265 . The ports are auto-sensing. cur Displays the current user ID configuration. and support half or full-duplex operation. Alteon OS 2000 Series The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Alteon OS 2000 series: Table 6-27 Port Configuration and Numbering on Alteon OS 2000 Series Model Alteon 2208 (1U) Alteon 2216 (1U) Alteon 2224 (1U) Alteon 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28 Fast Ethernet Ports The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port. /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports.0. Port configuration is different on Alteon OS 2000 series and 3000 series.Alteon OS 22. auto-negotiating. 315393-J.

To view menu options.Disable port cur . please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Alteon OS. The commands on Alteon OS 2000 series and their description are as follows: [Port 1 Menu] fast .2 Command Reference For more information on connectors. The default number is 1.Alteon OS 22. see page 276. 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for non-IP traffic for this port.Set default port VLAN id name . The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. January 2005 . The default is set to none. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.Set port name cont .Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic egbw .Gig Phy Menu pvid .Set port egress bandwidth Limit rmon .Fast Phy Menu gig .Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port iponly . 266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable port dis .Enable/Disable RMON for port tag . this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu. this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. see page 276.Set default port BW Contract nonip . nonip <BW Contract number.Display current port configuration Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet. pvid <VLAN number. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port.Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames at ingress ena . 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. To view menu options.0.

315393-J. /cfg/port <port number> fast|gig Port Link Configuration [Fast Link Menu] speed . ena Enables the port. This means that the port’s speed will be taken as the egress bandwidth.Set flow control auto . the egress bandwidth for an FE port will be 100m. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. The default is 0. you can configure the egress bandwidth limit of the port to match with the bandwidth link of the receiving router or the switch.0. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277.Alteon OS 22.Display current fast link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267 . It is disabled by default. Using this command.Set link speed mode . It is disabled by default. dis Disables the port. NOTE – You need Bandwidth Management license to use this command.Set full or half duplex mode fctl .Set auto negotiation cur . It is disabled by default. For example.) cur Displays the current port parameters. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port.2 Command Reference Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage egbw <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the egress bandwidth limit for the port to avoid overloading the receiving router or switch.

flow control.0. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu. 268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. and negotiation mode for the port link. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.2 Command Reference NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports.Alteon OS 22. Using these configuration menus. Table 6-29 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. January 2005 . you can set port parameters such as speed. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current port parameters.

The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation. it can be configured at any speed. 315393-J. However. You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link.Alteon OS 22. 4. and 8) with RJ-45 connectors. Their description is as follows: Four 1000BaseT ports (1. These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper. 2. When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link. full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on.0. Four dual-mode ports (3. 7. autonegotiation must be turned on. NOTE – For more information on connectors. 5. refer to the Alteon OS Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E. it is fixed at 1000 Mbps.2 Command Reference Alteon OS 3000 Series The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Alteon OS 3408: Table 6-30 Port configuration on Alteon OS 3408 Model Alteon 3408 (1U) 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1. These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269 . if 1000 Mbps is selected. and 6). When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link. 7. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber ports (9–12). 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 The Alteon OS 3408 contains 12 ports. 2. See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 274 for more details.

see page 271. The default number is 1. 7. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. It is disabled by default. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default. ena Enables the port.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. you see the menu below: [Port 1 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. 2.) 270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default is set to None. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. 7.2 Command Reference Single-Mode ports 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports When you select a single-mode copper port (1. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. dis Disables the port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. 2. It is disabled by default. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.0. or 8). iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. January 2005 . rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.

you can set port parameters such as speed. and negotiation mode for the port link. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. 7.2 Command Reference Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. Using these configuration menus. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. 2. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current port parameters. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. Not all options are valid on all ports.Set link speed mode . January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. 2. Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1.0.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271 315393-J. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. flow control.Set flow control auto .Set auto negotiate cur .Set duplex mode fctl . 7. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu [GE Copper Link Menu] speed .

Alteon OS 22. 272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. this option displays the SFP Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. you see a slightly different menu as below: [Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - SFP Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber SFP Ports When you select a single-mode SFP fiber port (9–12). see page 273. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default number is 1. To view menu options. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port.2 Command Reference Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. The default is set to None. 2. 7. January 2005 . pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.

315393-J. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.) cur Displays the current port parameters. dis Disables the port. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277.2 Command Reference Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl auto cur Menu] . It is disabled by default.Display current SFP gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. and negotiation mode for the port link. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.Set auto negotiate .Set flow control . you can set port parameters such as flow control. ena Enables the port.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273 . Using these configuration menus.Alteon OS 22. It is disabled by default.

you see the menu below: [Port 3 Menu] cop sfp pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu SFP Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options.0. see page 276. Dual-Mode Ports When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6). see page 277. 274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. sfp Displays SFP Gigabit Physical Link Menu. January 2005 . The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port.2 Command Reference Table 6-34 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9-12>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit Ethernet link port parameters.

(To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. The default number is 1. back copper|sfp|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down. It is disabled by default. The default is set to None. dis Disables the port. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.) cur Displays the current port parameters. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. It is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275 .0. 315393-J. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. ena Enables the port. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. If you choose none. It is disabled by default. The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available.2 Command Reference Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage pref copper|sfp Sets the port preference between copper or SFP mode. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens.

Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters.Set flow control auto . Using these configuration menus.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. and negotiation mode for the port link.Set auto negotiate cur . January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.Alteon OS 22. Table 6-36 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. 276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode.Set link speed mode .0. Not all options are valid on all ports. flow control. you can set port parameters such as speed.Set duplex mode fctl .

315393-J.Set flow control . enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Alteon Application Switch is reset. Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes.Display current SFP gig link configuration Table 6-37 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/sfp) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. you do not need to use apply or save. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277 .0.2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> sfp Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl cur Menu] . The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit link port configuration.Alteon OS 22. See the “Operations Menu” on page 433 for other operations-level commands.

To view menu options.Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem .0. see page 278. and disable the monitored port.Alteon OS 22. enable. When enabled. /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Menu [Port 1 Menu] add . January 2005 . Table 6-38 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu options that help configure the port.Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration 278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port.Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Configure Monitor Port Display All Mirrored and Monitored Ports and VLANs Port mirroring is disabled by default. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage.

BWM is turned off. the frame is sent to the monitoring port. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. In order to enable BWM. or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. the frame is sent to the mirrored port. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. NOTE – BWM is a software key-enabled feature that requires users to purchase a license and a key. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279 . VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. If you do not specify a VLAN. users need to enter the Bandwidth Management key using the /oper/swkey command. By default.2 Command Reference Table 6-39 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in. out. such as e-commerce transactions. cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. all traffic on that port will be mirrored. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port.0.Alteon OS 22. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). 315393-J. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic. /cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic.

you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts. By default. user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed. To view menu options. To view menu options.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur . see the Alteon OS 22.Alteon OS 22. The default is set to 0. To view menu options. The default is set to None.Enable/disable enforce policies on .2 Application Guide. To manage bandwidth on an Alteon Application Switch. specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization.Set SMTP server user name entries .0. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita- tions defined for any set of frames.Group menu user . group <BW Group number (1-32)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Group Menu. see the Alteon OS 22.Policy menu group . see page 281. Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-256)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu. entries <64k|128k|256k|512k|1024k> Sets the number of entries in the Bandwidth Management IP user table. 0 for default behavior> Sets the frequency of Bandwidth Management email in minutes.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off . see page 285.2 Application Guide. see page 284. 280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set number of entries in the BWM IP user table frequen . policy <BW policy number (1-512)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu.0. The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows.2 Command Reference [Bandwidth Management Menu] cont . frequen <1-1440 minutes. January 2005 . this option is disabled. For further details.Contract menu policy .0. For further details.Display current Bandwidth Management configuration NOTE – Up to 256 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on Alteon OS.Set the frequency of BWM email in minutes force .

the reordering of the packets does not occur.Time policy menu name .Display current BW Contract configuration Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage timepol <BW Contract time policy number (1-2)> Displays Time Policy Menu.Delete BW Contract cur .Enable BW Contract dis .Set Contract name policy .Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract mononly .Disable BW Contract del . /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number> Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration [BW Contract 1 Menu] timepol . By default.0. This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues.Enable/disable traffic shaping for this contract iplimit . The packets will exit in the order they came in. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281 315393-J. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration.Set Contract Precedence history . When disabled.Enable/disable overwriting TCP Window for this Contract ena .Set Contract Policy prec . name <15 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract.Alteon OS 22. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch. To view menu options.Set user (IP address) limiting type for this contract wtcpwin .2 Command Reference Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic. January 2005 .Enable/disable user (IP address) limiting for this contract iptype .Enable/disable monitor-only mode for this Contract shaping . this option is enabled.Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos . off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch. see page 283.

Alteon OS 22. Do not set the value to lower than 1500 bytes. The default policy number is 64. By overwriting the default window size. iptype <sip|dip> Defines the IP type for this contract. history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server. the user can modify the TCP window size to a lower value so that when the packet arrives carrying the bytes within that window size. January 2005 . The statistics are generated but no shaping or limiting will apply to this contract. For details. dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract. 282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. refer to the Application Guide. each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/policy on page 284. whether the user (IP address) limiting is enforced by the source IP address (SIP) or the destination IP address (DIP). iplimit disable|enable Enables or disables user (IP address) limiting for this contract. By default. it is enabled. In this context. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration. The default value is 1. shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent. ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract. the receiver of that packet does not have to wait for acknowledgement. wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract. By default. mononly disable|enable Enables or disables monitor-only mode for this Contract. del Removes this contract from the switch. If enabled. wtcpwin disable|enable Enables or disables overwriting TCP Window for this Contract. This may help reduce the traffic congestion. This command is used for design and auditing purposes only. it is disabled.2 Command Reference Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-512)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract. prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract.

315393-J.Set Time Policy from hour to . disable Disables the Time Policy command on the switch. The default is everyday. 1-512> Defines the policy number for the contract. the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. to <1-12am/pm> Sets the end limit of time in hours.Set Time Policy to hour policy .Set Time Policy enable . enable Enables the Time Policy command on the switch.Disable Time Policy delete . weekend (Saturday and Sunday) or everyday. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283 .Delete Time Policy cur . If am or pm is not specified.Enable Time Policy disable .0. from <1-12am/pm> Defines the time from where you need to start the time in hours. policy <BW Policy number.Alteon OS 22.Set Time Policy day from . the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher.2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number>/timepol <Contract time policy number> BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu This feature enables the user to configure different policies based on the time of the day using the following menu and commands: [BW Contract 1 Time Policy 1 Menu] day . weekdays (Monday to Friday). If am or pm is not specified.Display current Time Policy configuration Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage day <mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun|weekday|weekend|everyday> Defines the day(s) of the week.

resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy.2 Command Reference Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes Time Policy. /cfg/bwm/policy <policy number> Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration [Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv userlim utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set per user (IP address) Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy. The default value is 500Kbytes. The default value is 1000 kbps.Alteon OS 22. This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy. January 2005 . 284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. userlim <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the bandwidth limit for each IP address in the contract traffic.0. cur Displays the current Time Policy configuration on the switch. soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy. The default value is 2000 kbps.

1-256> Removes a contract from this group.Display current BW Group configuration Table 6-44 Bandwidth Management Group Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/group) Command Syntax and Usage add <BW Contract number. 315393-J.Remove Contract from this group del .Delete BW Group cur . otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit. del Deletes the bandwidth management policy. The default value is 8192 bytes. 1-256> Adds a contract to this group.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. With this option set to the default value of “0. cur Displays all current Bandwidth Management Group configurations. With this option set to the default value of “0.Add Contract to this group rem .0. rem <BW Contract number.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value.2 Command Reference Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit. cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285 .Alteon OS 22. del Deletes this Bandwidth Management group. buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy. /cfg/bwm/group Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu [BW Group 1 Menu] add .

Alteon OS 22. Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cur Bandwidth Management Current Configuration Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 256 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken. January 2005 .0.

0. When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled. the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled. trunk <trunk group number> Displays Trunk Group Menu. To view menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] stg trunk lacp vlan ntmstg cur Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters Table 6-45 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters. To view menu options. The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled. To view menu options. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Menu. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu. The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled. see page 292. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287 . see page 288.Alteon OS 22. see page 294. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. To view menu options. see page 297. 315393-J. the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed.

When multiple paths exist.Display current bridge parameters 288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state.Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove . If that path fails.0. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports.Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on . Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default .Port parameter menu add . Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1). Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802. STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch. Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port. Thus.Alteon OS 22. All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it.Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear .Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur .1p Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).Bridge parameter menu port . This command is turned on by default. [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg . The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN. January 2005 .Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off . Alteon OS supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups. Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration When multiple paths exist on a network. Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations.

Alteon OS 22. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default.0. cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters. see page 290. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. STP must be enabled. Table 6-46 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. remove <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. To view menu options. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289 . To view menu options.2 Command Reference NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy. see page 291. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu.

and the default is 32768. The lower the value. configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. To make this switch the root bridge.Alteon OS 22.0. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd . The range is 4 to 30 seconds. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg/brg Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . The range is 6 to 40 seconds. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage .Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging .Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). The range is 0 to 65535. and the default is 15 seconds. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 1 to 10 seconds. January 2005 . fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. and the default is 20 seconds. STP bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. 290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. and the default is 2 seconds.Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. 0 to disable) cur .Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello . the higher the bridge priority.

2 Command Reference Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs.Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur . and the default is 300 seconds. set this parameter to 0.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off . The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time. STP port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost STP is turned on by default for the port. 0 for default) on . cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds.Set port Priority (0-255) cost . When configuring STP bridge parameters. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291 .Display current port Spanning Tree parameters Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. To disable aging. the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage /cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #> Spanning Tree Port Configuration [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior .0.Set port Path Cost (1-65535.

Alteon OS 22. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. the lower the path cost. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. and 1 for Gigabit ports. with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports. off Disables STP on the port. and the default is 128. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. The range is 1 to 65535. on Enables STP on the port. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535. January 2005 . the faster the port. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. combining their bandwidth to create a single. /cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth and multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk capable devices.0. Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. larger virtual link. When trunk groups are configured. Generally speaking. The range is 0 to 255.2 Command Reference Table 6-48 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. 292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

dis Turns the current trunk group off.Delete trunk group cur .Enable trunk group dis . cur Displays the current trunk group parameters.Set BW contract for this trunk group add .Add port to trunk group rem .Alteon OS 22. the contract number is 256 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4.0. 315393-J.2 Command Reference By default. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group. ena Enables the current trunk group.Display current Trunk Group configuration Table 6-49 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group.Disable trunk group del . the trunk group is empty and disabled. del Removes the current trunk group configuration. add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293 . [Trunk group 1 Menu] cont . By default.Remove port from trunk group ena .

3ad standard allows two or more standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Alteon OS 22.0. Each external port in the Alteon OS can have one of the following LACP modes.3ad standard called the LACP trunks. logical link segment. NOTE – Refer to IEEE 802. January 2005 . This port initiates negotiation with the partner system port by sending LACPDU (Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit) packets. off (default) The user can configure this port to a regular static trunk group. This port only responds to the negotiation requests sent from an LACP active port. This protocol allows the user to group several physical ports into one logical port (LACP trunk group) with any switch that supports IEEE 802. 294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 supports IEEE 802. all ports are in off mode by default.3ad standard is Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). If a link in a LACP trunk group fails. active The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. and treating them as if they were part of a single. The maximum number of configurable trunk groups are 40: 12 user configurable trunks and 28 LACP trunks depending upon the maximum number of ports in the switch. Link aggregation is a method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed in full duplex. You can configure the trunk groups manually called the static trunks as well as you can configure dynamic trunk group using the IEEE 802.3ad standard on the Alteon OS.Alteon OS 22.3ad-2000 for a detailed information about the standard. passive The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical links for the link aggregation. traffic is reassigned dynamically to the remaining links of the LACP trunk group or is assigned to the standby LACP links.0. The 802. When the system initializes. At the core of the 802.3ad standard (LACP). The maximum number of active physical ports in any trunk group is eight and the number of standby ports is also eight. LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then aggregates them.

0.Alteon OS 22. All the aggregatable ports must have the same LAG ID. The default value is long. [LACP Menu] sysprio . To view menu options. see page 296. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295 . in conjunction with port priority. The link can generate Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) based on the operational key. Lower numbers provide higher priority. Please refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed information on this protocol. You can choose between short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds) timeout periods.Display current LACP configuration Table 6-50 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the Alteon OS. decides which eight ports should be combined to form a trunk group between two switches. You can form an active LACP trunk group with all the ports that have the same LAG ID. 315393-J. The rest of the ports stay in standby mode to substitute for any failed ports.Set LACP system priority timeout . and an aggregator for LACP to start negotiation on these ports.LACP port Menu cur . NOTE – All ports are in LACP off mode by default. cur Displays the current LACP configuration. Use the following commands to configure LACP on the Alteon OS. The system priority. You need to assign the same admin key to a group of ports to make them aggregatable. timeout <short|long> Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu. System priority is used when there are more than eight ports configured with the same adminkey. The default value is 32768. an operational key.2 Command Reference Each LACP active or passive port needs an admin.Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info port .

Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form an LACP trunk group.Set LACP port priority adminkey .Alteon OS 22. Table 6-51 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port #) Command Syntax and Usage mode <off for no LACP or active or passive> off: Using this option. passive: Using this option. January 2005 . Passive ports do not initiate negotiation. prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port. All ports are in off mode by default. The default value is 128. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk.Set LACP mode prio . cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port. Only active ports initiate negotiation with the partner system port by sending the LACPDU packets.Set LACP port admin key cur . you can turn LACP off for this port. you can turn LACP on and set this port to active. adminkey <1-255> Sets the admin key for this port.0. Lower numbers provide higher priority. you can turn LACP on and set this port to passive mode. 296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a selected port.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number> LACP Port Configuration Menu [LACP Port 1 Menu] mode . but only respond to the negotiation requests from active ports. active: Using this option.

which is enabled all the time. delete the VLAN. stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.Alteon OS 22.0. to create logical segmentation of workgroups. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. [VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur - Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. The default contract number is 256 on AD3 and 1024 on AD4.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains. By default. The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. For more information on configuring VLANs. cont <BW Contract number. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297 . and change the port membership of the VLAN. change the status of the VLAN. The default VLAN name is the first one. (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN. 315393-J. rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN. and to enforce security policies among logical segments. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership. see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34.

Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 270). cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. ena Enables this VLAN.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN.Alteon OS 22. del Deletes this VLAN. learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. Also. it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. By default. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration. jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN. NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. 298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN.

To view menu options. rip1 Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. see page 304. To view menu options. see page 301. To view menu options. see page 313.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip1 ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. see page 302. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. To view menu options see page 308. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299 . To view menu options. To view menu options. 315393-J. To view menu options see page 309. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. To view menu options. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu.0. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. see page 306. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. see page 304.

port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu.Alteon OS 22. see page 347. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. see page 332.2 Command Reference Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. To view menu options. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. To view menu options. see page 315. see page 324. To view menu options.0. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. To view menu options. rtrid <IP address (such as. 192. 300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 333.17. see page 330. To view menu options.101)> Defines the router ID. To view menu options. cur Displays the current IP configuration. January 2005 . The default gateway metric is strict.4. see page 331. For more information on gateway metrics. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu.

315393-J.4.101)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation. Each interface can belong to one VLAN. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301 .Alteon OS 22.0. Each IP interface represents the Alteon Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network. It is enabled by default.0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation. ena Enables this IP interface.17. del Removes this IP interface. Table 6-54 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192.255. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The Alteon Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces. cur Displays the current interface settings. though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. dis Disables this IP interface. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface.255. The Interface option is disabled by default.

The default is 2 seconds. January 2005 .44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation. The default is 8 attempts. 192.Enable default gateway dis . This option is disabled by default.Set priority of default gateway route arp .Alteon OS 22.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN vlan . The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. 302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative.4.Set interval between ping attempts retry .Set IP address intr . Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways.0.Delete default gateway cur . The intr option sets the time between health checks.Set VLAN number prio .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default IP Gateway Configuration [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr . The range is from 1 to 120 seconds. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway. Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing.Display current default gateway configuration NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways. Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as.Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena .Disable default gateway del .17. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up.

2 Command Reference Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage prio <high|low> Allows you to change the priority of the default gateway route to either high or low. or RIP protocols). cur Displays the current gateway settings. then learned default routes will always be preferred over the default gateway route. If you set the priority to high. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303 . NOTE – By default learned default route has higher priority than the configured default gateway route. If you set the priority to low. then the default gateway route will always be preferred over learned default routes (such as from OSPF. see page 347.0.Alteon OS 22. ena Enables the gateway for use. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. Default Gateway Metrics For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled. relative to learned default routes. BGP. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. 315393-J. This command is disabled by default. dis Disables the gateway.

ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. where any packet routed to this destination will be dropped. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation.Remove static route cur .Set re-ARP period in minutes . cur Displays the current IP static routes. Table 6-56 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number> Adds a static route.Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.Add static route rem .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/route IP Static Route Configuration [IP Static Route Menu] add . ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.0. destination subnet mask. the route becomes a black hole route. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur ..0. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.0. January 2005 . You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address. rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route.Alteon OS 22. In any IP communication.0. /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.Static ARP Menu .Display current ARP configuration 304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. and gateway address. If a gateway address is 0.

cur Displays the current ARP configurations. cur Displays current static ARP configuration. NOTE – Alteon OS 21. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. 315393-J. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over a switch reboot.17.Delete an ARP entry cur .Alteon OS 22.Add a permanent ARP entry del .101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry. del <IP address (such as. To view options. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes. see page 305. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305 . Alteon OS 20. /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically.0.0 and above allows the static ARP configuration to be retained over reboots. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes. [Static ARP Menu] add .4.Display current static ARP configuration Table 6-58 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.2 Command Reference Table 6-57 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. 192.

Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on . off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr . Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured. January 2005 .Add local network definition rem .0. dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts.Alteon OS 22.Display current local network definitions 306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Remove local network definition cur . see page 306. and to remove local networks.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Menu] local . [IP Local Networks Menu] add .Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6-59 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching.Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur . Forwarding is turned off by default. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch. /cfg/l3/frwd/local Local Network Route Caching Definition This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache.Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off . This command is disabled by default. To view menu options.

0. For details.0.0.255 128.255 205.255.0.255.2 Command Reference Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local) Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307 . This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0.255.0 .0.0.127. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current local network definitions. by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Alteon Application Switch.0.32. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network. The default gateways must be within range.0.0 205. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 307.0 NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway. Table 6-60 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges Local Host Address Range 0.32. you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache.0 255.0. By default.0 128. the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address. Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently.0.0.0.0.0.0.255.0 Mask 128.255.0.0.255.0.255. 315393-J. the local network address and mask are both set to 0.0.32.205. and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0.255. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Alteon Application Switch.Alteon OS 22.0 .255.0 .0 through 255.255. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached. To limit the route cache to your local hosts.255 Address 0.0.0 128.

0. The default value is 0.17.0. For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). then assign the route map to the peer.Delete Network Filter cur . The default address is 0. delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration. 192.IP Address mask .Disable Network Filter delete .0. 255.0.Enable Network Filter disable . enable Enables the Network Filter configuration.0.Alteon OS 22.0. 308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled.IP Subnet mask enable .0. assign the network filter to a route map.255. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6-61 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter.4. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf Network Filter Configuration [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr .255. mask <subnet mask (such as. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.

2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Route Map Configuration Menu Route maps control and modify routing information. NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure. One to three path preferences can be configured.Alteon OS 22. see page 312. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route. For more information. see page 311. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. The path with the higher preference is preferred. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309 . For more information. 315393-J. which affects both inbound and outbound directions. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. [IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 - Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu.0.

Default value is 10. delete Deletes the route map. disable Disables the route map. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map.Alteon OS 22. The smaller the value. cur Displays the current route configuration. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. the higher the precedence. enable Enables the route map.0. 310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The default is type 1. January 2005 . none—Removes the OSPF metric. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map.

See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 308 for details.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number> IP Access List Configuration Menu NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure. enable Enables the access list. delete Deletes the access list.0. 315393-J. disable Disables the access list. [IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur - 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration Table 6-63 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist) Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number.Alteon OS 22. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311 . cur Displays the current Access List configuration. metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.

action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action. 312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path> Autonomous System Filter Path NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure. [AS Filter 1 Menu] as .Display current AS Filter configuration Table 6-64 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath) Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number. delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter.Disable AS Filter delete . enable Enables the Autonomous System filter.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.AS number action .Delete AS Filter cur . January 2005 .Set AS Filter action enable . disable Disables the Autonomous System filter.0.Enable AS Filter disable .

0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip1 Routing Information Protocol Configuration The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP). [Routing Information Protocol Menu] updat . mask information is sent. version 1 (RIP1) parameters. If information about a network is not received for 90 seconds.Set update period in seconds spply .Globally turn RIP OFF cur .Enable/disable vip advertisement on . the metric associated with the network is raised to infinity (U) – the metric is set for 16. RIP is one of a class of algorithms known as distance vector algorithms.Globally turn RIP ON off .Enable/disable supplying static routes poisn . RIP uses broadcast User Datagram protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information.Enable/disable listening to route updates deflt . The RIP1 Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol.Alteon OS 22. The distance or hop count is used as the metric to determine the best path to a remote network or host where the hop count does not exceed 15 hops assuming a cost of one for each network. This update contains known networks and the distances (hop count) associated with each one.Enable/disable listening to default routes statc . 315393-J. no mask information is exchanged. For RIP2.Display current RIP configuration NOTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. which means the network has become unreachable. the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update. This option is turned off by default.Enable/disable supplying route updates lsten . RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313 .Enable/disable poisoned reverse vip . If information about a network is not received for 180 seconds (six update intervals). it is removed from the routing table. For RIP1.

When enabled. the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down.2 Command Reference Table 6-65 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1) Command Syntax and Usage updat <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds. If a VIP route exists in a routing table. This command is disabled by default. the switch supplies routes to other routers. January 2005 . cur Displays the current RIP configuration. This command is disabled by default. but gives them lower priority than configured gateways. poisn disable|enable This command is disabled by default. vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. the switch supplies static routes. and will not be advertised. lsten disable|enable When enabled. When disabled. the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers. When enabled. statc disable|enable This command is disabled by default. the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table. When enabled. It is set at 30 seconds by default. and the switch will continue to advertise the route. deflt disable|enable When enabled.0. off Globally turns RIP OFF. it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. the switch uses only split horizon. on Globally turns RIP ON. 314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch learns routes from other routers.Alteon OS 22. spply disable|enable Enables or disables supplying route updates. the route gets removed from the routing table. the switch rejects RIP default routes. If we disable all the real servers using operation command. When disabled. This command is disabled by default.

The backbone acts as the central OSPF area.Alteon OS 22. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link.OSPF MD5 Key Menu host . one area must be designated as area 0.OSPF Route Redistribute Menu lsdb . if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu.OSPF Host Entry Menu redist .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.Globally turn OSPF ON off . The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. 315393-J.OSPF Summary Range Menu if .Display current OSPF configuration Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583. [Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex . known as the backbone.Globally turn OSPF OFF cur . See page 318 to view menu options. range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses.Export default route information on . Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone. See page 321 to view menu options. refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide.0.Set the LSDB limit for external LSA default .OSPF Area (index) Menu range .OSPF Virtual Links Menu md5key . See page 317 to view menu options. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. In any AS with multiple areas. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315 .OSPF Interface Menu virt . which then distributes it to other areas as needed. See page 319 to view menu options.

See host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. Up to 128 host routes can be configured.Alteon OS 22. off Disables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. January 2005 . It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit.0. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000. default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Use none for no default. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 323 to view menu options. 316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. See page 322 to view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. on Enables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch.

routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.Set authentication type spf .17.101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number. MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.Set area type metric .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex Area Index Configuration Menu [OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid .4.Alteon OS 22. type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. 192. the area type must be defined as transit. For example. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value.Delete area cur . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317 .Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable . Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area.Disable area delete . NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed.Enable area disable . when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone. Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate.Set area ID type . For example. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas. 315393-J.0.Display current OSPF area configuration Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as. Typically. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices.Set stub area metric auth . a stub area is connected to only one other area. auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required.

101> Displays the IP address mask for the range.Enable range .4.Set IP address .17. delete Deletes the OSPF area.Delete range . 318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . enable Enables the OSPF area. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Alteon Application Switch.2 Command Reference Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. 192.Set IP mask .Enable/disable hide range . disable Disables the OSPF area.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range.0.17. 192.Disable range .4.Alteon OS 22.Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration. /cfg/l3/ospf/range OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu [OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] .Set area index . mask <IP address (such as.

Alteon OS 22. enable Enables the OSPF summary range. disable Disables the OSPF summary range.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319 . /cfg/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration 315393-J. cur Displays the current OSPF summary range.

dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet.Alteon OS 22. retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. January 2005 . Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface.0. prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Alteon Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. delete Deletes OSPF interface. enable Enables OSPF interface. (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 6-69 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. 320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. disable Disables OSPF interface. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface.

0. nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor.Set router ID of virtual neighbor .Disable interface . mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. which is set to be in an interval of seconds.Set hello interval in seconds .0.0. retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.Set transit delay in seconds .Set retransmit interval in seconds . 315393-J.0.Set area index .Set dead interval in seconds . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321 .Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. Default is one seconds. Default is 0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/virt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] .Set MD5 key ID . which is set to be in an interval of seconds. Default is 40 seconds. trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet.Alteon OS 22. Default is five seconds. Default is none. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet.Set authentication key .Enable interface .Delete interface . key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is none.

17. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host.0. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link.Delete host entry cur . disable Disables OSPF host entry.Enable host entry disable .Set host entry IP address aindex .Set cost of this host entry enable .Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.4.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/l3/ospf/host OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr . 192.Set area index cost . 322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. enable Enables OSPF host entry. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.Disable host entry delete . January 2005 . disable Disables OSPF virtual link.2 Command Reference Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage enable Enables OSPF virtual link. cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host.101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry.

NULL at the end. enter none. enter routing map numbers one per line. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) . [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add .Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . To remove all 32 route maps.Display current route-maps added Table 6-72 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. Removes routing maps from the rmap list.2 Command Reference Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes OSPF host entry.Alteon OS 22.Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. 315393-J.. |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. cur Displays the current OSPF host entries. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 323 . enter all. cur Displays the current route map settings. NULL at end.0.Export all routes of this protocol cur . export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. enter all.To add all the 32 route maps. To remove specific route maps.. /cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. To add specific route maps. enter routing map numbers one per line. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed.

BGP is turned off by default. cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. January 2005 . it is called external BGP (eBGP).Alteon OS 22.0. When run between different autonomous systems. it is called internal BGP (iBGP). rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). When run within an autonomous system. up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet. fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. /cfg/l3/bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network. The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration Table 6-73 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <key. BGP is defined in RFC 1771. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. 324 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems.

on Globally turns BGP on. When multiple peers advertise the same route. An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). pref <preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. 315393-J.2 Command Reference [Border Gateway peer aggr as pref on off cur - Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. within an autonomous system. or use the local preference if you are using iBGP. To view menu options. Each border router. see page 326. as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. see page 329.0. or a business division). exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP. The path with the higher value is preferred. either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university.Alteon OS 22. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy. To view menu options. a business enterprise. There is one fixed route per IP interface. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 325 .

4.Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo . January 2005 . Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu.Set keep alive time advert .Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable .0.Enable peer disable . using dotted decimal notation.Delete peer cur .Add rmap into out-rmap list remi . The peer option is disabled by default.Add rmap into in-rmap list addo .0.0.Redistribution menu addr .Set remote IP address ras .Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi . cur Displays the current BGP configuration.Disable peer delete .Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers. /cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number> BGP Peer Configuration Menu [BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist . 326 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. 192.Set min time between route originations ttl .0. see page 328.101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router). To view the menu options.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage off Globally turns BGP off. The default address is 0.Set hold time alive .Set min time between advertisements retry .Set connect retry interval orig .Set remote autonomous system number hold . addr <IP address (such as.17. which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks.

orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. alive <keepalive time (0. dis Disables this peer configuration. It is set at 0 by default. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. when exhausted. advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. The default number is set at 1. addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list. It is also used to support multi-hops. 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds. hold <hold time (0.0.Alteon OS 22. ena Enables this peer configuration. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. in seconds. would cause the packet to be discarded. It is set at 90 seconds by default. which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list. 315393-J. 3-65535)> Sets the period of time. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 327 .

or none. Similarly. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action. None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. 328 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. Defaults routes can be configured as import. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration. originate. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration. /cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu [Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this peer configuration. Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table. you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol. redistribute.

Delete aggregation current . fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes. /cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number> BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure. [BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr .101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate.Disable aggregation delete . Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address.Set aggregation IP address mask .17.Display current aggregation configuration This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers.Set aggregation network mask enable .Enable aggregation disable .4. such as 192. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 329 .2 Command Reference Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes. vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes. static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration.0. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

Turn Forwarding OFF cur .255.2 Command Reference Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage mask <IP subnet mask. such as 255.0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate. current Displays the current aggregate configuration.Turn Forwarding ON off .0.Display current port configuration The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. By default. January 2005 . delete Deletes the selected aggregate.255. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. disable Disables the selected aggregate. off Disables IP forwarding for the current port. enable Enables the selected aggregate. the port forwarding option is turned on. /cfg/l3/port <port number> IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on .Alteon OS 22. Table 6-78 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port. 330 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

the configured secondary will be used instead. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping. and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server.17.Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network. secon <IP address (such as.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 331 . Table 6-79 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as.Set default domain name cur .Set IP address of primary DNS server secon . traceroute. If the primary DNS server fails. 315393-J. Use dotted decimal notation. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname . and tftp commands. 192.Alteon OS 22.0.4.4. For example: mycompany.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch.17. 192.

Alteon OS 22.17. 332 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Alteon Application Switch.4. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.4.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu [Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr .Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur .Set IP address of second BOOTP server on .17. addr2 <IP address (such as.Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 . 192. January 2005 .101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default.0.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay. 192.Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off .Display current BOOTP relay configuration The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. Table 6-80 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. on Globally turns on BOOTP relay.

By default. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu. This menu is used for configuring up to 1024 virtual routers on this switch. see page 345. allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches. If the master fails. To view menu options.0. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 333 . one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu. To view menu options. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. For more information on VRRP. see the “High Availability” chapter in your Alteon OS 22. based on a number of priority criteria. see page 334. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp VRRP Configuration Menu [Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. VRRP is disabled. see page 341. see page 338.0. Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-1024)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu.2 Application Guide. To view menu options. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.

334 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current VRRP parameters. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch.Set renter priority .Set IP address . By default. holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address.Disable virtual router .Enable or disable sharing .Set interface number .Enable virtual router .Alteon OS 22. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.Priority Tracking Menu .Enable or disable preemption . This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process.Delete virtual router . this option is disabled. see page 346. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number> Virtual Router Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] .Set virtual router ID . hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing. January 2005 . a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.Set advertisement interval . in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other.2 Command Reference Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu.0. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. To view menu options.

The default value is 1. The vrid of virtual server routers where the virtual router IP address is the same as the virtual server can be between 1 and 1024.0. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. During the master router election process. addr <IP address (such as. The default value is 1. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs.2 Command Reference Virtual routers are disabled by default. 315393-J. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). This can be any integer between 1 and 254. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. The default value is 100. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. To view menu options.0. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins.17. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. 192. each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination. The default value is 1. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 335 . the device with the highest IP interface address wins. see page 336. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID. The default address is 0.4. even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router. If there is a tie.Alteon OS 22.0. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled.0.

del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports . if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. dis Disables this virtual router.Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers .Alteon OS 22. By default. By default. this option is enabled. Note that even when preem is disabled. cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration [VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] . this option is enabled. 336 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). even when in backup mode.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. When enabled.0. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. ena Enables this virtual router.Enable/disable tracking HSRP .Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers .Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN . this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346).Enable/disable tracking other interfaces .Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports .2 Command Reference Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. January 2005 . When enabled. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. an Alteon proprietary extension to VRRP.

This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. This command is disabled by default. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default. ports disable|enable When enabled. Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch.2 Command Reference Criteria are tracked dynamically. and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch.0. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 337 . the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. Some tracking criteria (vrs. this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. reals.Alteon OS 22. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. otherwise called “virtual interface routers. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. 315393-J. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default.” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. ifs disable|enable When enabled. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-82 on page 335) is enabled. ifs.

Enable virtual router group dis .Alteon OS 22. the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch. When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch. This command is disabled by default. In networks where HSRP is used.Set priority for virtual router group ena .Delete virtual router group cur .0. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup Virtual Router Group Menu This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs.Priority Tracking Menu name .Remove virtual router from group prio .2 Command Reference Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable <priority (1-254)> Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. January 2005 .Add virtual router to group rem . Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch.Set virtual router group name add . The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected. optimizing routing efficiency. If failover occurs on a customer link.Disable virtual router group del . This command is disabled by default. [VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track . hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet.Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration 338 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. If there is a tie. name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters. dis Disables the virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 339 .2 Command Reference Table 6-84 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. During the master router election process. see page 340. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track). If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. Each virtual router group can have up to 64 virtual routers. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. add <virtual router number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual router to the group. ena Enables the virtual router group. prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration.0. 315393-J. The default value is 100. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. rem <virtual router number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual router from the group.

An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN.Alteon OS 22. ports disable|enable When enabled. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. Criteria are tracked dynamically.0. the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. 340 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. This command is disabled by default. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346). [VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. January 2005 . This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group. the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic.

0.Set interface number . This command is disabled by default.Enable or disable preemption . cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group. optimizing routing efficiency. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master.Disable virtual router . Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address.Enable virtual router . On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.Enable or disable sharing .Set renter priority .Set advertisement interval .2 Command Reference Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] .Priority Tracking Menu .Set virtual router ID . which forces all virtual routers on the Alteon Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group. In networks where HSRP is used. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments.Delete virtual router . 315393-J.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 341 .

If there is a tie. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. January 2005 . preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID for this group. By default. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. Note that even when preem is disabled.2 Command Reference NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Alteon Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. even when in backup mode. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). 342 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). To view menu options. By default. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. where only one switch is active at any time. This can be any integer between 1 and 254.0. The default value is 100. this option is enabled. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. During the master router election process. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). this option is enabled.Alteon OS 22. The default is 1. see page 346. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. When enabled. When enabled. The default switch IP interface number is 1. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router.

The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 343 . del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. then the tracking option will be available only under group option.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration [Virtual Router vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the virtual router group. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. 315393-J. dis Disables the virtual router group.

This command is disabled by default. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. ifs disable|enable When enabled. In networks where HSRP is used. This command is disabled by default. optimizing routing efficiency. 344 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 6-87 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover.Alteon OS 22. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers.0. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. ports disable|enable When enabled. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. January 2005 . This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch.

[VRRP Interface auth passw del cur - 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 345 . The IP interface itself is not deleted. Table 6-88 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication). This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above).Alteon OS 22. passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. 315393-J. cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters. or password (password authentication).

Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports .Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. 346 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing.Alteon OS 22. The default value is 2. The default value is 2. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur . ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN.Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . The default value is 2. The default value is 2. Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router.Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv .Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals . Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 336). The default value is 10. January 2005 .Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp . hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts. ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch.0.

at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 336) are enabled. The default value is 10. Table 6-90 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc) Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. enabled gateway in line. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 347 . All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway. /cfg/l3/metrc <metric name> Default Gateway Metrics If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. These priority tracking options only define increment values. This provides basic gateway load balancing.2 Command Reference Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN. Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled. a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected.Alteon OS 22.0. There are two metrics. which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 347. roundrobin 315393-J.

Any packets above the current threshold will be logged. fragment <allow|deny> Sets the handling of out-of-order IP fragment packets during filtering. 1-255|none> Defines the search window for pattern matching beginning from the start of the packet stream. 348 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 351. The default is allow.2 Command Reference /cfg/security Security Configuration Menu [Security Menu] ipacl pgroup port udpblast seclog fragment pdepth cur IP Address ACL Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Port Security Menu UDP Blast Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set out of order IP fragments handling in filtering Set packet depth for pattern matching Display current Security configuration Table 6-91 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu.0. the switch will let through all the out-of-order fragments in filtering. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. When set to deny. To view menu options. see page 350. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. seclog <rate threshold (in packets)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second. To view options. To view menu options. When set to allow. cur Displays the current security configuration. port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. To view menu options. see page 352. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu. The window is in units of packets. the switch will drop these packets. pdepth <# of packets. see page 349.

When traffic ingresses the switch.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.Display All IP address/mask for access control Table 6-92 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied. [IP ACL Menu] add . rem <IP address/mask pair index> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied. If a match is found. then the client traffic is blocked.Add IP Address/Mask for access control rem .Remove IP Address/Mask for access control cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/security/ipacl IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu Alteon OS can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch. cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 349 . the client source IP address is checked against this pool of addresses. defined by the IP address/mask pair index. defined by the IP address/mask pair.0.

del Deletes the pattern group. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter. [Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name . name the pattern group. The filtering commands in Alteon OS Advanced Denial of Service Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns. Note: You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group. the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network. cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group.Remove SLB string from group del . it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember.0. the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet. 350 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To configure SLB strings.Delete pattern group cur .Add SLB string to group rem . January 2005 . Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command. rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group.Set pattern group name add . To view existing strings and their ID numbers. Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings. and then apply the group to a filter. group them into a pattern group.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number> Pattern Matching Menu When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings. also on page 411. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 411. add <string ID> Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number.Display current configuration Table 6-93 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group.Alteon OS 22. When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter.

Enabling this command will allow detection of the following DoS attacks: Smurf: ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP (x. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet. Xmascan.x. cur Displays the current security configuration on this port.255).0.Alteon OS 22. Nullscan. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal to destination IP.x. [Port 1 Menu] dos ipacl udpblast cur - Enable/disable DOS attack detection Enable/disable IP ACL processing Enable/disable UDP Blast processing Display current port configuration Table 6-94 Port Security Menu Options (/cfg/security/port) Command Syntax and Usage dos disable|enable Enables or disables Denial of Service (DOS) protection on this port. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. Fraggle. LandAttack.255). Fraggle: UDP packet sent to a broadcast destination IP (x.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/port <port number> Port Security Configuration Menu Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf.x. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets whose source or destination port is zero. udpblast disable|enable Enables or disables UDP blast protection on this port. ipacl disable|enable Enables or disables IP access control List denial on this port. 315393-J. PortZero. URG and PSH bits are set. and ScanSynFin. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros.x. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 351 .

If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second. using any integer from 1 to 65535. cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/udpblast UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers. The maximum port range is 5000. rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. While you can configure multiple port ranges. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection. as well as the maximum packet rate per second. [UDP Blast Protection Menu] add . UDP traffic is shut down on those ports.Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default . 352 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. the last number that can be used is 5300. Alteon OS can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port. Alteon OS supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers.Display all UDP blast protection Ports Table 6-95 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. UDP traffic will be dropped.0. the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports.Alteon OS 22. You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range.Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem . When the maximum number of packets/second is reached. thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. If the first port number is 300. January 2005 .Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur .

To start the dump program. Spanning Tree. IP. paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. The screen display can be captured. BOOTP. edited. For a complete description of how to use setup. at the Configuration# prompt. enter: Configuration# dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. at the Configuration# prompt. as described on page 354. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP. see Chapter 2. enter: Configuration# setup /cfg/dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 353 . VLAN parameters.2 Command Reference /cfg/setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time. port speed/mode. and placed in a script file. When using Telnet to configure a new switch.” To start the setup program.0. which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection.Alteon OS 22. “First-Time Configuration. and IP interfaces. 315393-J.

the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. 354 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To start the switch configuration download. at the Configuration# prompt. enter: Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. /cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gtcfg command is used.Alteon OS 22. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command. at the Configuration# prompt.0. and not locked by any application). The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the ptcfg command is used. January 2005 . and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission. To start the switch configuration upload. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. the apply action will be performed automatically. the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. enter: Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname.

it can become overutilized. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. January 2005 355 . Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. With this software feature. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand.CHAPTER 7 The SLB Configuration Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Alteon Application Switch. 315393-J. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations.

To view menu options. see page 372. see page 401. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb SLB Configuration [Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv linklb advhc pip peerpip on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Inbound Linklb Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers. To view menu options. 356 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 358. see page 383.Alteon OS 22. port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity. To view menu options. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 364. January 2005 . gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. see page 399.

linklb Displays Inbound Link Load Balancing Menu. see page 421. To view menu options. 315393-J. see page 408. wap Displays WAP Menu. see page 430. using Layer 2. To view menu options. see page 412. see page 415. To view menu options.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu. see page 431. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 441). This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration. When the pip is defined. To view menu options. see page 413.To view options. see page 419. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. When this command is enabled. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow. sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. deny. on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. or NAT traffic. peerpip Displays Peer Proxy IP address Menu. off Globally disables Layer 4 services. To view menu options. To view menu options. All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved). pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 357 .

deny.Set real server name weight .Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP addport .Enable real server dis .Set Global SLB availability for real server maxcon .Delete real server cur .Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy .IDS Command Menu rip .Disable real server del .Display current real server configuration 358 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable/disable fast health check operation submac .Set weight for real server avail .2 Command Reference Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) Filters configured to allow. January 2005 . or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated. however. /cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration [Real server 1 Menu] layer7 .Remove real port from server remote .0.Set backup real server inter .Enable/disable source MAC address substitution ena . These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu.Layer 7 Command Menu ids .Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup .Add real port to server remport . require Layer 4 software services.Set interval between health checks retry .Alteon OS 22.Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr .Set IP addr of real server name .Set maximum number of connections tmout . Application Redirection filters. Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work.Enable/disable client proxy operation fasthc .

rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format. maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server. weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier. avail <server weight (1-48)> Displays the currently available real server for Global server load balancing and allows the user to change to another real server for Global server load balancing. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 359 . If no backup servers/server group are configured. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time. client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. By default. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting.000. such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached. and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370). client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. each real server is given a weight setting of 1. ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. By default. name <string. the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up.0. the number of maximum connections is set at 20. The required parameters are: Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. To view menu options. When this command is used. see page 363.2 Command Reference This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value. maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. see page 362. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1.

using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. if the real server becomes inoperative. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. For UDP services. The default setting is 10. In order to prevent table overflow. Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch's Session Table. Then. The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks. TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch's binding table. Using the tmout option. The default is 8 attempts 360 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client's system. backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server. the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). The data is transferred until the client ends the session. the switch pings servers to determine their status. use this option to assign a backup real server number. The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service. The backup server is also used in overflow situations. When persistent is activated. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts.Alteon OS 22. and the session table entry is then removed.0. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 32768 minutes. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit. The default interval is 2 seconds. the session is recorded in the table. In certain circumstances. this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again. When a client makes a request. For TCP services.

See /oper/slb/ena on page 436 for an operations-level command. submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. When enabled. See /oper/slb/dis on page 436 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. This command is enabled by default. This option.Alteon OS 22. the real server goes down operationally as soon as the physical port connected to the real server goes down. With this option enabled (default). enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. this option is disabled. Use this command with caution. as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. By default.0. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. By default. When enabled. A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned. the real server will go down only after the configured health check interval. NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. when the apply and save commands are used. the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. fasthc disable|enable Enables or disables Fast Health Check operation. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. When disabled. 315393-J. remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server. this option is disabled. This option. disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 361 . when the apply and save commands are used. dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service.

Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude . You need to use the write servers when you want to modify the directory on the server.Remove SLB string for content load balance cookser . exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching. This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only. this option is disabled.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server. By default. assigns the cookie. this option is disabled. By default.Enable/disable exclusionary string matching ldapwr .Enable/disable LDAP Write server cur . cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. January 2005 .Add SLB string for content load balance remlb . and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client. You need to use read servers when you only want to browse the directory. Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage addlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server. remlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server. /cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration [Real Server 1 Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb .Display current real server configuration This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing. 362 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. This server gets the client request. The write server can conduct both read and write operations. LDAP servers are of two types: read servers and write servers. ldapwr disable|enable Enables or disables LDAP write server.

cur Displays the current real server configuration.Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport .2 Command Reference Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current real server configuration.Display current real server configuration Table 7-4 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids) Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server. oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID). Refer to your Application Guide for more information. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 363 .0. which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization). /cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids Real server IDS Configuration Menu Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks.Set Port for ID Server oid .Alteon OS 22.Override OID for SNMP HC comm . comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks. 315393-J. [Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan . An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches. This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks.Override community string for SNMP HC cur . Note: IDS can only be configured on real servers between one to maximum number of ports on the switch. idsport <port number> Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server.

Display current group configuration This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups. Each group must consist of at least one real server.Set minmisses hash parameter viphlth .Enable/disable the access to this group for operator ena . 364 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set health check type backup .Set backup real server or group name .Enable real server in this group dis .Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood oper . See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370 for more information.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration [Real server group 1 Menu] metric .Set metric used to select next server in group rmetric .Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids .Set real server failure threshold idsrprt .0.Set metric used to select next rport in server content .Alteon OS 22.Disable real server in this group add .Remove real server del . rmetric Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which port in the real server will be the target of the next client request.Set health check content health . Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection.Set an advance group health check formula mhash .Set Intrusion Detection Port advhlth .Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsfld .Add real server rem .Delete real server group cur . Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request.Set real server group name realthr . Each real server can belong to more than one group. January 2005 . Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing. The default setting is leastconns.

315393-J. name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated. which also means the option is disabled idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server.use HEAD method Sets the type of health checking performed. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. backup r<real server number (1-256)>|g<group number>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group. 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit. If any time. the number reaches this minimum limit.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks. the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again.Alteon OS 22. The default is tcp. The default threshold is 0. Then. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 365 . if the real server group becomes inoperative. health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|httphead|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap| sslh|radius-auth|radius-acc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap| snmp<n>|tftp|rtsp|sip http .0. The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails.use GET method. See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 367. The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below). realthr <real servers (1-15. a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. httphead . use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number.

1-1023> Disables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group. 1-1023> Enables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis.. ena <real server number. oper disable|enable Enables or disables the real server group operation.Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3. 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers. You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group.). if a real server is a member of more than one group. it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. This command supports two boolean operators. viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. dis <real server number. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits. or you can also set the formula expression as none. This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services.You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server. When viphlth is disabled. January 2005 . By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected. ids disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection Server (IDS) load balancing for the designated real server group. 366 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. you can configure this real server to accept requests from all the groups or any number of groups that this real server is member of. rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators. For example. whether DSR is enabled or disabled. This feature is enabled by default. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long. add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group. AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values. you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group. the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks. However.

pings the server. the virtual server will become inoperative. This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 367 . use HTTP 1. you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers. Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server. Note: If the content is not specified. arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking. httphead Allows the switch to declare if the server is up or not just by locating the URL header and not wait until all the URL contents are received. The health check options are described in the following table.0 GET occurs. SLB Health Check Types Using the health command.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. icmp For Layer 3 health checking. check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service. 315393-J. the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description.Alteon OS 22. http For HTTP service. Otherwise. Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only. cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group.0.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. dns For Domain Name Service. You can use this command to test the validity and access to the hypertext links or to look for any recent modification to the URL. an HTTP/1.

script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication. The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. During the handshake. negotiate an encryption and compression method. radius-auth. check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server. 368 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter. check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login. check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server.Alteon OS 22. imap For user mail service. ftp For FTP services. and establish a session ID for each session. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Alteon Application Switch and the server.2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description pop3 For user mail service. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. January 2005 . check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. <n> denotes the health script number (1-8). nntp For newsgroup services.0. smtp For mail-server services. wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. the user and server exchange security certificates.

it will send the bind result message and the switch will mark the server as alive. sip Sets the health check type to sip. the health check will fail. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 369 . ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP.2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. rtsp Sets the health check type to RTSP. This health check consists of three LDAP messages over one TCP connection: a bind request.0. If there is no content configured the switch will issue an RTSP OPTIONS method. tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. and an unbind request. If content is supplied the switch will issue the RTSP DESCRIBE method. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203. You must enable UDP to perform SIP load balancing. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. If the server is up. a bind result. If the response to either method is RTSP/200 then the health check passes.2.0. You can perform the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) health check by using SIP PING request. The LDAP health checks enable the switch to determine if the LDAP server is alive.Alteon OS 22. If this is not the response. 315393-J. The switch must send an unbind request so that the server does not hold resources indefinitely. The RTSP health check can operate with or without content. The switch sends an anonymous bind request to the server. At regular intervals. This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server. <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ. The switch administrator can choose LDAP version 2 or 3 as both the versions are compatible with Alteon OS 22. the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group.

the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server. When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. These metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. roundrobin Round robin. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired.Alteon OS 22. and so on. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers. With this option. With this option. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. helping to maximize successful cache hits. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases. and shut down connections faster than slower servers. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance. the second real server gets the next connection.0. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request. with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time. leastconns Least connections. For Application Redirection. the issuing process starts over with the first real server. For Server Load Balancing. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. due to their ability to accept. This option is the most self-regulating. process. followed by the third real server. This is particularly useful in caching applications. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. 370 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request. the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. consider using the hash metric. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets. new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection. January 2005 . When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server.2 Command Reference Server Load Balancing Metrics Using the metric command. hash Like minmisses.

roundrobin. the smaller is the weight assigned to that server. With phash enabled. a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. With this option. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights. This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up.0. The higher the bandwidth used. the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. With the phash metric. hash. when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 359). If the first hash hits a dead server.Alteon OS 22. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels. the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics. it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time. and phash metrics. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 371 . bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down. the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down. 315393-J. With this option. NOTE – Under the leastconns. Weights are not applied when using the minmisses metrics.2 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description response Real server response time.

such as http. see the sport command on page 385. To view services menu options. and so on. ftp.Alteon OS 22. Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters: Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu. January 2005 . see page 375. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments. vip <virtual server IP address> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation. 372 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name. the service number. The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server. To get more information about well-known ports.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration [Virtual Server service vip dname cont weight avail addrule remrule layr3 ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP addr of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Set Global SLB weight for virtual server Set Global SLB availability for virtual server Add Global SLB rule to domain Remove Global SLB rule from domain Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing. The allowable port range is from 13 to 65534.

It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them. the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. It does not include the hostname portion (www. By default. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. weight Sets the Global server weight for the virtual server. An example would be foocorp. The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 34. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract.0. If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable. To clear the dname. layr3 disable|enable Normally. see hname below. The default is rule 1. the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server.gov. the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier. the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default). and so forth). However. 1-64> Removes Global SLB rule from domain. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 373 . . specify the name as none. cont <BWM contract (1-256)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service.Alteon OS 22.com. Rule allows the server selected for GSLB to use different metric preference based on time of the day. and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. To define the hostname. ftp.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server. addrule <rule.edu. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections. Each domain has one or more rules.com. Each rule has metric preference list. avail Sets the Global SLB availability for the virtual server.org. and the Internet group code (. 1-64> Adds Global SLB rule to domain. the more connections that will be directed to the local site. The server selected for GSLB selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the preference list of the rule. . 315393-J. The default is 1. The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client. The higher the weight value. and so forth). all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. remrule <rule. The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization. Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs. . www2.

January 2005 . 374 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables this virtual server. Use this command with caution. del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration.0.Alteon OS 22. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server. dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests.

The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services.Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service pbind .Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode epip . See page 380 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP.Set BW contract for this virtual service urlcont .Enable/disable SIP load balancing xforward .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name> Virtual Server Service Configuration This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 375 .Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB direct .Set hostname httpslb .Set HTTP SLB processing cont .Display current virtual service configuration 315393-J.Enable/disable DNS query load balancing http .Delete virtual service cur .Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments nonat .Enable/disable direct access mode sip .Set real port hname .Alteon OS 22.Set persistent binding type rcount .Enable/disable delayed binding udp .Set real server group number rport .Set multi response count thash .0. NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic.Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses dnsslb .Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan del . [Virtual Server 1 http Service Menu] group .Set hash parameter dbind .Enable/disable UDP balancing frag .

For example: httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-256). You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 256) of the real server group to add to this service. January 2005 . 376 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications: urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing. based on browser type urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. If a dname of “foocorp. enable/disable checking for cookie in URI browser: Enable or disable SLB. this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract. to add a hostname for Web services.Alteon OS 22. others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. To clear the hostname for a service. Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract. starting point of the cookie value. If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>.foocorp. the switch will map the virtual port to this real port. “www.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service.0.com” was defined (above). hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. The default is set at 1. you could specify www as the hostname. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name. By default. number of bytes to be extracted.

which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 377 . they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier. since the services are related. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding. such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer. By enabling the sslid option. The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. with clientip command enabled.0. or multi-page Web forms. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. In Alteon OS 22.0. if it has previously been enabled for a particular application.2. This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service. The default number is 1. non-repudiation. see the Persistence chapter in the Alteon OS 20. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers. 315393-J. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth. Web site search results. The default is set at 1024.Alteon OS 22. HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence. or until the maximum count is reached. pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default).2 Application Guide. and security. and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. For more information on cookie option. all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server. different services from the same client may not map to the same server. SSL provides authentication. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out. The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). The Alteon Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found. see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 381. Whereas. HTTPS).

If the user does not select any. When stateless is enabled. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup. the source IP address. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. no session table entry is created.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. and minmisses SLB metrics. see the cache command in Table 7-14 on page 390. you have to bind to a new server every time. or both source IP address and source port. Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. phash. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. For more information. January 2005 . DNS uses UDP and TCP. disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. the switch will use default hash parameter. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP Redirection for Global server load balancing on a per VIP basis. so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. This option is disabled by default. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default). you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled. For example. In those environments.Alteon OS 22. Disabling HTTP Redirection causes GSLB to use proxy IP address for HTTP. You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP. This option does not substitute IP addresses. udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). For example. dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable Direct Access Mode on the switch.0. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. 378 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. which is sip. Since no session is created. This option is enabled by default.

315393-J. When SIP is enabled.0. By default. you can scan and hash calls based on a SIP Call-ID header to an MCS server. The SIP processing occurs at application level in order to parse out messages coming from client side as well as the server side.Alteon OS 22. Using SIP on your switch.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage sip disable|enable Enables or disables Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server load balancing on the Alteon OS. When enabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 379 . del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. SIP is a UDP-based application-level control protocol for creating. Use this command with caution. you can load balance Nortel’s MCS (Multimedia Communication Server) proxy servers. Using the epip command. Nortel Networks’ MCS is a SIP enabled application Server. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server. You can use only minmiss as the load balancing metric since the load balancing is performed based on the Call-ID. xforward disable|enable Enables or disables inserting the X-Forward-For header into the client HTTP request to preserve the client IP information. epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. You need to turn Direct Access Mode (DAM) on to perform SIP load balancing. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service. This feature is applicable only on HTTP protocol. X-Forward-For is a special header that stores and identifies the client IP information. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. you can configure SIP service on the service port 5060 for a virtual server. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. modifying and terminating sessions with one or more participants (documented in RFC3261).

thereby enabling the service. The default is hash. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. To clear the hostname for a service. 380 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the source IP address. hash: If you use hash.0.foocorp. and minmisses SLB metrics. “www. to add a hostname for Web services. which is sip. you could specify www as the hostname.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. use the command: # hname none rtspslb hash|patternMatch|dis This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb. RTSP will parse the URL and will hash the URL to select a server to load balance. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. January 2005 . the switch will match the string or pattern within the URL to select a server based on the string configured on the real server. the switch will use default hash parameter. RTSP will use Layer 4 metrics to select a server to load balance. If a dname of “foocorp. either hash or patternMatch. phash. or both source IP address and source port. For example. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash.Alteon OS 22. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. If the user does not select any.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service 554 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration This menu displays virtual services configured on service port 554 for RTSP traffic.com” was defined (above). patternMatch: If you select this option. dis: If set at disable. the destination IP address. [Virtual Server group hname rtspslb thash del cur 1 rtsp Service Menu] Set real server group number Set hostname Set RTSP URL load balancing type Set hash parameter Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number.

Cookie-Based Persistence The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence.2 Command Reference Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this virtual service.0. cur Displays the current virtual service configuration. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 381 .Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Each parameter is explained in the following table.

For cookie rewrite.. When a client sends a request without a cookie.g.2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Command Syntax and Usage for pbind cookie Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service/pbind cookie) Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. or none <return> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Enter the name of the cookie. the switch. enter e to enable this option. The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. Look for cookie in the URI. the server responds with the data.Alteon OS 22. In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode). 12/31/01@23:59) .. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: . The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI.0. a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e. enter d to disable this option. January 2005 .. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64). 382 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e. see the Alteon OS 22. generates the cookie value on behalf of the server.2 Application Guide.g. 45:30:90) ... and the switch inserts an Alteon persistence cookie into the data packet. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. r: Rewrite mode. and not the network administrator.. i: Insert mode.0. the extracting length must be 8 or 16. In this mode. the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client. To look for cookie in the HTTP header. For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence.

deny.Filter Advanced Menu name . The types of information include: IP protocol TCP/UDP ports TCP flags ICMP message type 315393-J. redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications.Set action group . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 383 .Enable/disable filter inversion ena .Set vlan id invert .Set filter name smac .Delete filter cur .Display current filter configuration The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters.Enable filter dis . There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv.Disable filter del .Set destination IP address dmask .Set destination MAC address sip .Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action . Each filter can be configured to allow.Set source MAC address dmac .Set source IP address smask .Set real server group for redirection rport . and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Menu] adv . page 388) that can be used to provide more information through syslog. This command is disabled by default.Set source IP mask dip .Alteon OS 22.Set IP protocol sport .Set destination IP mask proto .0.Set real server port for redirection nat .Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport .Set which addresses are network address translated vlan .

see page 388.Alteon OS 22. traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below. See details below for more information on producing address ranges. For more information.0> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect.255. 255. The default is any.255. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. For more information. dip any|<IP address> If defined. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address. redirect. traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Alteon Application Switch port Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. 384 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default is any if the source MAC address is any. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387.0)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. dmac any|<MAC address (such as. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address. masks. deny.0. The default is any. January 2005 . Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.255. dmask <IP subnet mask (such as. To view menu options. 255.2 Command Reference The following parameters are required for filtering: Set the address. sip any|<IP address> If defined. smask <IP subnet mask (such as. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below. smac any|<MAC address (such as. name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter. or any. or any.255. and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow.

Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. Specify the port number. traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage proto any|<number>|<name> If defined. Number 1 2 6 17 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. just as with sport above. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3 dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. The default is any. or “any”. The default is set at any. Specify the protocol number. The default is any. Specify the port number. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 385 . name. traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter. traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. or “any”.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. range.0. or “any”. name. range. name.

Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values. Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters. In addition. The goto action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter. the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports.0. The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile.slb/filt/adv/goto command.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specifies the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default). This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID. To specify the new filter to goto. effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Alteon Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-22 on page 399). If source is specified. nat goto 386 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). If dest is specified. Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. This can be used for building basic security profiles. Also. this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 356). such as for web cache redirection. use the /cfg. this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. For valid Layer 4 health checks. January 2005 . nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above). Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile.Alteon OS 22. group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. The default is set at 0.

don’t act. the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range. del Deletes this filter. But by applying this filter to a VLAN.0. and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured. A VLAN has a set of member ports. dis Disables this filter. When a range of IP addresses is needed. The default is any. 315393-J. This option is disabled by default. perform the assigned action. For example. If the conditions for the filter are not met. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis. the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 387 . ena Enables this filter. You have to manually add the filter to the port. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 .4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter. the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range.Alteon OS 22. If the conditions of the filter are met. to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch.

you could define the following parameters: Table 7-13 Filtering IP Address Ranges Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128.255.255 128.2 Command Reference As another example.IP Advanced Menu layer7 .0.255 0.255.255.802.0 128.0 255.Set BW contract revcont . To do this.Set NAT or L7 lookup session timeout idsgrp . January 2005 .0.0.127.Enable/disable WAN link load balancing dbind .Security Menu icmp .Enable/disable client proxy epip .0.Enable/disable persistent binding for redirection proxy .0.Display current advanced filter configuration 388 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Layer 7 Advanced Menu security .255.0 .0.Set IDS server group for intrusion detection SLB idshash .TCP Advanced Menu ip .0 128.Enable/disable firewall redirect hash method linklb .Enable/disable logging fwlb .0.Alteon OS 22.Set hash parameter for intrusion detection SLB thash .Set client proxy IP address cache .0 0.Set hash parameter for Filter goto .Set GOTO filter ID reverse .0.Enable/disable delayed binding for redirection pbind .Enable/disable caching sessions that match filter log .1p Advanced Menu tcp .0.0 /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv Advanced Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Advanced Menu] 8021p .0. you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet.0.0.Set ICMP message type cont .Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan cur .0.Enable/disable creating session for reverse side traffic proxyip .Set BW contract for the reverse session tmout .

To view menu options.1p bits in all the frames that pass through the switch. By default. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract. each filter added to an IDSLB-enabled port can be assigned a unique IDS real server group.1p is the specification for prioritizing the net- work traffic at the Layer 2 level in your switch. tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu. "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type. To view menu options. see page 393. security Displays the filter Security Menu. Using this command you can preserve 802. idsgrp <real server group number. see the Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. see page 391. 1-1024>|none Sets the IDS server group for intrusion detection server load balancing. When filtering is used for IDSLB. or both. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP. see page 392. The default is set at 4 minutes. This command helps you assign a different Bandwidth management contract from the one configured on the ingress filter.0. see Table 7-18 on page 394.Alteon OS 22. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip). For a list of ICMP message types. The default is set at any. the contract number is set at 256. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes.0. 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for the reverse traffic session. IEEE 802. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 8021p Advanced Menu. see page 397 icmp any|<number>|<type. see page 395. ip Sets IP advanced menu. To view menu options.2 Application Guide. layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 389 . revcont <BW Contract. To view menu options. destination IP (dip).

A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch. log disable|enable Enables or disables generating of syslog messages when a filter is hit. The Default is auto. proxyip <IP address> Defines client proxy IP address. If the user does not configure the proxy IP address in the filter. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. reverse disable|enable Enables or disables the creation of a session for traffic coming from the reverse side. a hashing algorithm is used to ensure that inbound packets and outbound packets for a pair of IPSA/IPDA traverse through the same firewall. This command allows for the creation of a session entry for reverse traffic to avoid inspecting traffic in both directions. fwlb disable|enable To ensure that the stateful inspection behavior of firewalls is maintained. goto <filter ID> Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. linklb disable|enable Enables or disables WAN Link Load Balancing. this option is disabled. By default.0. so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. the action on this filter must be set to goto. Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 378). Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. the switch uses the proxy IP address configured under /cfg/slb/pip command. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. Cache is enabled by default. The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. If the dport is 80 or 21. In order to use this feature. enabling this option changes the hash of the filter from a WCR hash to a FWLB hash. Filter searching will then continue from the designated filter ID. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. January 2005 . this option is disabled. cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. The switch uses the configured proxy IP address to replace the client's IP address. By default.Alteon OS 22. Use this command to specify the new filter to go to. 390 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. This option is disabled by default.

This option applies only when redir or nat is specified as the filter action.1p Advanced Menu] value .1p bits in the packet's VLAN header. The 802. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 391 .1p configuration Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them.1p value match . any proxy defined for the switch port using the pip command (see page 399) is not performed for traffic meeting the filter criteria. this is enabled. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.Enable/disable 802. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure. If disabled.1p Advanced Menu This feature provides the Alteon OS the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802. This is useful when certain traffic must retain original IP address information. pbind disable|enable Enables or disables persistent binding for redirection on this filter. Using the epip command.Alteon OS 22. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration. 315393-J. By default. Enable or disable proxy IP address translation for traffic matching the filter criteria. [802.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage dbind disable|enable Enables or disables delayed binding for redirection on this filter.Set 802. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. By default. or when other forms of translation (such as Application Redirection or NAT) are preferred.0.1p value. epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN.1p value matching cur . /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/8021p 802.Display current 802. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables client proxy.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp Advanced Filter TCP Configuration [TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] . By default. the switch matches the original priority bits information with the priority bits information after the frame processing is complete. ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching.Display current TCP configuration These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags.Enable/disable TCP SYN matching .0.Enable/disable TCP URG matching . this option is disabled. syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching. 392 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching. cur Displays current 802. this option is disabled. this option is disabled.2 Command Reference Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage match disable|enable Enables or disables matching of 802. rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching.Enable/disable TCP ACK matching .Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching . By default. When the Management Processor needs to reuse the packet to send to the destination. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. January 2005 . Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching.1p value. By default.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable TCP RST matching .Enable/disable TCP FIN matching .Enable/disable TCP PSH matching . By default. By default.1p configuration.

Set IP TOS mask newtos . 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of IP packet’s length. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration.Set new IP TOS length . /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip IP Advanced Menu [IP Advanced Menu] tos . option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching. 315393-J. refer to RFC 1340 and 1349.2 Command Reference Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. By default. For more information on ToS. this option is disabled.Enable/disable IP option matching cur . newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service. ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching.Display current IP configuration Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 393 . tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask. this option is disabled.0. By default. length <IP packet length (in bytes). Any packet exceeding the maximum length will not match the filter.Alteon OS 22.Set IP maximum packet length option .Set IP Type of Service tmask .

ICMP Message Types The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command. Table 7-18 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex param timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded ICMP parameter problem ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply 394 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command.0.

For more details. addstr <string id (1-1024)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu [Layer 7 Advanced Menu] urlcont . please refer to your Application Guide. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 395 . Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth. This information is needed to add to or delete static session entries in the switch’s session table so that it can perform the required persistency for load balancing.Alteon OS 22. remstr <string id (1-1024)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering.Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap . remrd <string id to redirect from (1-512)> <string id to redirect to (2-512)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above. rdsnp disable|enable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS snooping on this filter.Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr .Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr .Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd . The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add.Display current layer 7 configuration Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter.Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa . This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id. Radius snooping allows the Alteon OS to examine RADIUS accounting packets for client information. 315393-J.Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup parseall . addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping.Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur .Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd . The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add. Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add.Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup .Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp . then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID.

By default. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. it sends a RADIUS accounting start packet on UDP port 1813 to the bound server. This command is enabled by default. l7lkup disable|enable Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter. subsequent packets can be ignored. The “framed IP address” attribute is used to rebind the RADIUS accounting session to a new server. the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers. please refer to your Application Guide. January 2005 . redir). this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. When enabled. Once this packet is found. For more details. When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server. After the RAS receives the Radius accept packet. that is PIP:PPORT. deny. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. The switch forwards this reply to the RAS. this option is disabled. 396 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. However.Alteon OS 22. The application switch snoops on the RADIUS accounting start packet for the “framed IP address” attribute. When combined with a filter action (for example. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. When parseall is disabled. This feature allows for RADIUS and WAP persistence by binding both (RADIUS accounting and WAP) sessions to the same server. cur Displays the current advanced Layer 7 configuration of the filter including the Radius/Wap persistence settings. The server replies with a Radius Accept or Reject frame. ftpa disable|enable Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS. The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT). A WAP client is first authenticated by the RADIUS server on UDP port 1812. the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client 's private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address.2 Command Reference Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage rdswap enable|disable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS persistence on this filter.

Alteon OS 22. subsequent packets can be ignored. When parseall is disabled. This command is enabled by default. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter.0. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client. matchall disable|enable Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu [Security Menu] ratelim addgrp remgrp pmatch matchall parseall cur Rate Limiting Menu Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable pattern matching Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets Display current Security configuration Table 7-20 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security) Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. To view menu options see page 398. Currently. and ICMP protocols. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. 315393-J. Once this packet is found. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command. UDP. However. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 397 . pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. cur Displays the current configuration. the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP.

UDP. or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration Table 7-21 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim) Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. UDP. January 2005 . the client is said to be held down. any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked. or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit. When blocking occurs. 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting. or ICMP rate limiting. 398 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. dis Disables TCP. UDP. A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received. 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting.Alteon OS 22. Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. and ICMP. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu [Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP. timewin <seconds. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. The client is held down for a specified number of minutes. after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through.0. UDP. The supported protocols are: TCP. The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. holddur <minutes.

server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch. 315393-J.Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy . router. Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address. This option is disabled by default. To make port filter changes take effect immediately.Display current port configuration Alteon OS switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis. Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration [SLB port 1 Menu] client .0. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable server processing rts .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 399 . Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally.Remove filter from port idslb . re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports.Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan .Add filter to port rem . Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally.Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur . or another switch.Enable/disable filtering add . the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports. directly or through a hub. NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port.Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt . Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing. expanding your topology options. clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 436). it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect. the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic.Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw . When server processing is enabled.Enable/disable client processing server .

hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. When the PIP is defined.2 Command Reference Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port. In the case of client processing. This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. as is possible in complex routing environments. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. IDSLB is enabled on a port and a real server group is designated for IDSLB. In Alteon OS 22. For example. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22. each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 384). For example. IDSLB is done at the end of filter processing or at the end of client processing where filtering is not enabled. This option is disabled by default. For more information on using rts. Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover.2 Application Guide. idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing on this port. 1-100. Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT). intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. cur Displays the current system parameters. see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .This option is disabled by default. This option is disabled by default.0. This option is disabled by default. rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port. In Server Load Balancing applications. 1-100.0. This option is disabled by default. 400 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. this forces response traffic to return through the switch.0.2. rather than around it. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. When pip is used with Application Redirection filters.

Enable/disable HTTP redirect based GSLB usern .Enable/disable HTTP redirect to remote real server name norem .Remote Site Menu network . DSSP is a proprietary protocol that resides above TCP.Set sessions utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) cpucap .Enable/disable authoritative DNS direct based GSLB hostlk . network <network (1-128)> Displays Network Preference Menu.Display current Global SLB configuration Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the menu for a remote site.Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt .Network Preference Menu rule .Enable/disable virtual service hostname matching http . see page 406. see page 405.Set CPU utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) mincon .Enable/disable encrypting remote site updates on .Set interval in seconds for remote site updates sesscap .Globally turn Global SLB ON off .Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur . rule <rule (1-128)> Displays the Rule Menu. GSLB uses the health and response time to select the server in the GSLB selection engine.Set sessions available capacity threshold dns . see page 403.Set DSSP version 1 or 2 to send out remote site updates port .Set TCP port number for DSSPv2 remote site updates sinter .0. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 401 . 315393-J. The switch performs this periodically on every remote site using Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP).Alteon OS 22. For more information. please refer to your Application Guide.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) at any given site performs periodic SLB health checks to determine the health and response time of the remote real server corresponding to the virtual server at the remote site. In addition.Rule Menu version . To view menu options. To view menu options. [Global SLB Menu] site . To view menu options. GSLB sends the health and response time together with the local session and CPU utilization information that are collectively known as remote site updates.

hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration. sesscap <Session utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for session utilization capacity. the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration.Alteon OS 22. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect. only the domain name will be used to match. The default TCP port is 80. If usern is enabled.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage version <DSSP version 1 or 2> Defines the version of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) that is used to send out the remote site updates. mincon <available sessions threshold. When enabled (default). in addition to the domain name. When enabled. 0-65535> Defines the capacity threshold for the sessions available on the real server for GSLB. this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits. When disabled. January 2005 . but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request. The range is between 10 and 7200 seconds. This option is enabled by default. The default configuration is 90%. This option is disabled by default. sinter <remote site updates interval in seconds. The default configuration is 90%. 10-7200> Sets the time interval in seconds for remote site updates. If disabled. cpucap <CPU utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for the CPU utilization capacity. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch. the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name> <virtual server domain name> 402 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. port <TCP port number> Sets the TCP port number for remote site updates for Global server load balancing. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS direct-based GSLB. the client is redirected to the new site's IP address. will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain. the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects. usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name.

Each site has a virtual server for the domain. By default. cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration. the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch. If disabled. if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing. The combination of a virtual server and a virtual service is called a domain. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 403 . Each domain has one or more sites. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 441). but will not hand off requests to this switch. Each virtual server has a domain name. the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols.0. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other. Each virtual service has a host name. 315393-J. For HTTP protocols. you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu. GSLB is turned off. encrypt This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. /cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number> GSLB Remote Site Configuration The switch initiates a global server selection to direct client traffic to the best server for a given domain.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage norem This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing. off Turns GSLB off for this switch. If enabled.Alteon OS 22. This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch. Each virtual server has a number of virtual services. Each virtual service has a group of real servers.

If both are enabled. Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates. Both services cannot use the same port. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. disable the updates. January 2005 . The local virtual server has a number of local virtual services Each local virtual service has a group of local or remote real servers. enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here.Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon . this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80.2 Command Reference At a local site for a domain.Enable remote site dis .Disable remote site del . Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing. The remote real servers are the virtual servers at the remote sites.0. If the remote site primary switch fails. If enabled (default). there is a local virtual server but no remote virtual server. secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch. [Remote site 1 Menu] prima . the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead.Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name . The default is set at none. 404 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch will not send state updates. By default.Delete remote site cur . ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing. configure the Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 259). Use dotted decimal notation. name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site. If your local firewall does not permit this traffic.Display current remote site configuration Up to 64 remote sites can be configured. Note: When update is enabled.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable remote site updates ena . If disabled. the Alteon OS Web-based interface also uses port 80.Set remote site name update .

The preferred network contains a subset of the servers for the domain. 255.Set source IP address mask .255. [Network 1 Menu] sip .255. cur Displays the current remote site configuration. The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing.Delete network cur . del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration. Up to 128 network preference numbers can be set.Remove virtual server from network addreal .0)> This IP address mask is used with the source IP (SIP) address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request. mask <IP subnet mask (such as. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 405 . /cfg/slb/gslb/network <network number> GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu Network preference selects a server based on the preferred network of the source IP address for a given domain.Enable network dis .0.Alteon OS 22.Remove remote real server from network ena .Set source IP and network netmask addvirt .2 Command Reference Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site.Add virtual server to network remvirt .Disable network del . 315393-J.Add remote real server to network remreal .Display current network configuration Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Defines the source (client) IP address. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.

cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration.0. [Rule 1 Menu] metric start end ttl rr dname ena dis del cur - Metric Menu Set start time for rule Set end time for rule Set Time To Live in seconds of DNS resource records Set DNS resource records in DNS response Set network preference domain name for rule Enable rule Disable rule Delete rule Display current rule configuration 406 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. del Deletes the network entry. ena Enables the network. addreal <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to the network. The GSLB selection selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the metric preference list of the rule.2 Command Reference Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage addvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual server to the network. You can configure one or more rules on each domain. No virtual server is added by default.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/slb/gslb/rule GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Rules allow the GSLB selection to use different metric preferences based on time-of-day. remvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual server from the network. remreal <real server number (1-1023)> Removes a real server from the network. dis Disables the network. Each rule has a metric preference list. January 2005 .

The maximum length for the domain name can be 34 characters. del Deletes the rule. The default is zero. dis Disables the rule.Alteon OS 22. but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes. dname <34 character (wildcard "*" allowed) domain name> | none Defines the domain name for the rule for network preference. start <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the start time for the rule. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load. Default is none. ena Enables the rule. The default is zero.2 Command Reference Table 7-26 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-16)> Displays Metric Preference Menu. Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic.0. but will generate more DNS traffic. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 407 . cur Displays the current rule configuration. 315393-J. see page 408. with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers. end <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the end time for the rule. You can use wildcard “*” while creating the domain name. rr <rr (1-10)> Sets the DNS resource records that how many DNS resource records will be returned in the DNS response. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds. To view menu options. The default is 2 records.

Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur . This command applies only if you select network as the metric. see page 409. /cfg/slb/layer7 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu [Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir .Server Load Balancing Menu dbindtm .Add network to gmetric=network remnet .Display current metric configuration Table 7-27 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric) Command Syntax and Usage gmetric leastconns|roundrobin|response|geographical|network|random|availability|qos|minmisses|hash|local|always|remote|none Defines the metric to select the next real server for GSLB. To view menu options. cur Displays the current configuration of the metric.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric Global SLB Rule Metric Menu [Rule 1 Metric 1 Menu] gmetric .Remove network from gmetric=network cur . The default is none. January 2005 .Set metric to use to select next server addnet . remnet Allows you to delete a network that was added to the selected metric.0.Display current Layer 7 configuration Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu. 408 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Web Cache Redirection Menu slb . addnet Allows you to add a network to the selected metric.

If this command is disabled. see page 411.Alteon OS 22. If this command is enabled.2 Command Reference Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration. If this command is disabled. This option is enabled by default.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache .Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie . the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server. To view menu options. /cfg/slb/layer7/redir Web Cache Redirection Configuration [Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal . cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server.Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header . 315393-J. This option is disabled by default.Display current WCR configuration Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server.Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash . the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server. dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections. If this command is enabled.Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur .0. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 409 .

the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1. hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI.1 header. cur Displays the current URL expression table. January 2005 . This option is enabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers. If this command is disabled.0 header to the origin server. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. If hashing is disabled. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. This option is disabled by default. you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255.1 header.0 header to a cache server or origin server. If this command is enabled.Alteon OS 22. header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header. If hashing is enabled. This option is disabled by default.0. the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key. 410 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

Set HTTP error message addstr . All other methods are optional.Add HTTP method type remmeth . The methods GET and HEAD must be supported by all general-purpose servers.Rename SLB string for load balance addmeth . The software supports both HTTP 1. These strings will only be used for filtering string pattern matching.2 supports 22 request methods by default.0. remstr <SLB string ID> Removes this SLB string from the real server.1 to perform HTTP request methods. rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing.0.Alteon OS 22. HTTP allows an open-ended set of methods to be used to indicate the purpose of a request. 315393-J.” addstr <l7lkup|pattern> Allows the user to define a string that can be used for server load balancing or filtering by selecting either a Layer 7 look up string or a pattern match.Remove SLB string for load balance rename .Enable/disable case sensitive for string matching cont . you can define a string for server load balancing or a string for Layer 7 lookup. A method is case-sensitive. The default message is “No available server to handle this request.Remove HTTP method type case . If you choose l7lkup string. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 411 . You can see a list of supported default methods by using the command cur in this menu.Set BW contract for the SLB string cur . If you choose pattern string.0 and HTTP 1. 1-32> Allows you to add HTTP request methods of maximum 32 characters to your switch software. addmeth <Method. you will have the option to choose between ascii or binary strings on a specific offset of the IP frame.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/slb Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu [Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message . Alteon OS 22.Add SLB string for load balance remstr .Display current configuration Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs.

Display current WAP configuration Table 7-31 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap) Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests. January 2005 . cur Displays the current WAP configuration 412 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. cont <SLB string ID [1-1024]> <BW contract number [1-256]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage remmeth <Method ID> Allows you to remove HTTP methods from your switch software. all load balancing strings and all the request strings arriving on the switch will have to be converted to lower case before doing any string comparison.Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug . /cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration [WAP Options Menu] tpcp . case disable|enable Enables or disables case sensitivity for string matching.WAP debug level cur . Using this command you can do either case sensitive or case insensitive string comparison. cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers) and the supported HTTP request methods.0. The default is set at 0. This option is disabled by default. debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages. If you disable case sensitive.

ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 413 .Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios .Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips . peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses.Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm .Display current Layer 4 sync configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities. This option is enabled by default. To view menu options. pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses. Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu. This option is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips . filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration [Config Synchronization Menu] peer . see page 414. This option is disabled by default. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch.Set stateful failover update period cur .Synch Peer Switch Menu filt .Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports .Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update . Peers are sent SLB. and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. This option is enabled by default. This option is disabled by default. This option is enabled by default.0. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. FILT. Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration.Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state .

This option is disabled by default. This option is enabled by default.Alteon OS 22. By default. /cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number> Peer Switch Configuration [Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr . update <seconds.Set peer switch IP address ena . The active switch sends update packets of new persistent binding entries.2 Command Reference Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches. 414 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default value is 30 seconds.Disable peer switch del .Delete peer switch cur . if any. 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.Enable peer switch dis .Display current peer switch configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address. this option is disabled.0.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch. dis Disables the peer for this switch. cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration. to the backup switch at the specified update interval. state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state.0.0. The default is 0. January 2005 .

Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix .Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup portbind .Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat .Enable/disable Ingress Port For Session Table Binding fastage .Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan .Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture tpcp . To view menu options.Set persistent mask intrval .Set SLB session attack inspection interval allowlim .Alteon OS 22. /cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration [Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk .Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet . see page 421.Set SLB session attack alert allowable limit submac .Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace .Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu.Enable/disable Source MAC address substitution direct . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 415 .Set management network mmask .0.Service Mapping Table Real Port Menu imask .Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur . 315393-J.SYN Attack Detection Menu smtport .2 Command Reference Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration.Set management subnet mask pmask .Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage .

direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage smtport Displays Service Mapping Table (SMT) Real Server Port Menu. the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch. The default is 255.255. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. mnet <IP address> If defined. this option is disabled. the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment.255. But if you enable this command.255. Typically. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution. intrval <time window for collecting sessions (0-3600)> This command allows you to configure the time interval (from one second to one hour) to specify how frequently you want to check the SLB sessions (attacks) the switch received. pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255. Using this command you can add or remove a number of real server service port(s) that will process client traffic by-passing the server.255.0)> Sets persistent mask. In other words. the switch will generate a syslog and an SNMP trap to alert the administrator that the switch is under SLB attack.255. allowlim <allowable limit (1-2097104)> This command allows you to specify the maximum number of sessions the switch can receive at any given period of time.255.255. You can set this limit by using the next command in this menu: allowlim. If the number of sessions exceeds this limit.0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation. mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. At the configured interval of time the switch will check if the number of sessions is within the configured limits. The default is 255.255.255. January 2005 . This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server. The default is 255.255. this service port’s client request will not be processed by the server processor. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option. see page 418. imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. By default.255. 416 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.255. management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.0.255.255.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers.

By default. which causes the time to double per increment).0. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. The default is 0. By default.2 Application Guide). 315393-J. this option is disabled. The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure. This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. portbind disable|enable Enables or disables the inclusion of the ingress port number in the session table look up. (Value is set in bits rather than seconds. If a large value of fastage is used. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server. The default interval is two minutes.0. The default interval is two seconds. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics. a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Alteon Application Switch. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. this option is enabled. If a large value of slowage is used. By default. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 417 . this option is disabled. see “Service Failure” in the Alteon OS 22. The default is 0. slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration. a session can remain in the session table for months. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed. Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information.Alteon OS 22.

January 2005 . remove <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to remove a service port from the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor. thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm.Display current SYN attack detection configuration Table 7-35 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection. cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration.Display real port configuration Table 7-36 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport) Command Syntax and Usage add <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to add a service port to the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.Remove real port cur .0. 418 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Add real port remove .Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld .Alteon OS 22. /cfg/slb/adv/smtport Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu [SMT Real Port Menu] add . cur Displays real port configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/adv/synatk SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu [SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval .Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur .

ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Sets the time-to-live for DNS resource records. ena Enables inbound link load balancing.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu [Inbound Linklb group ttl drecord ena dis cur Menu] Set real server group Set Time to Live of DNS resource records Domain Record Menu Enable Inbound Linklb Disable Inbound Linklb Display current Inbound Linklb configuration Table 7-37 Inbound Link Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-256)> Sets the real server ISP group number. cur Displays current inbound link load configuration. drecord <domain record number (1-64)> Displays domain record menu. To view menu options. dis Disables inbound link load balancing. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 419 .0.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. see page 420.

January 2005 .Disable Domain Record del . entry <linklb entry number (1-8)> Displays the link load balancer’s mapping menu for the virtual and real servers.Virt Real Mapping Menu ena .Alteon OS 22.Set Domain Name entry . dis Disables the domain records. ena Enables the domain records.Enable Domain Record dis .0. cur Displays the current domain records.Display current Domain Record configuration Table 7-38 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb/drecord) Command Syntax and Usage domain <34 character domain name>|none Allows you to configure the domain name. Default is none. See page 390 to view menu options.Delete Domain Record cur . del Deletes the domain records.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu [Domain Record Menu] domain . 420 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

WAP Health Check Menu aphttp .Alteon OS 22. /cfg/slb/advhc Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu [Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script .Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord/entry Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu [Virt Real Mapping 1 Menu] virt . 1-1024> Defines the virtual server number for mapping. real Defines the real server number for mapping. dis Disables the entry for drecords.Set Virtual Server Number real .0.Disable Entry del .Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc .Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver .Delete Entry cur .SNMP Health Check Menu waphc . cur Displays the current real and virtual server mappings for drecords entries. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 421 .Enable Entry dis .Set RADIUS secret minter .Display current Entry configuration Table 7-39 Command Syntax & Usage virt <virtual server number.Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration 315393-J.LDAP version secret . ena Enables the entry for drecords. del Deletes the entry for drecords.Set Real Server Number ena .

0. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. When disabled.Alteon OS 22. the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration. you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. To view menu options. see page 425. Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port. The default is set at 10. To view menu options. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. 422 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. this option is disabled. January 2005 . minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. see page 423. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port. see page 426. The default is none. secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. To view menu options. like HTTPs. By default. The default is 2. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification.2 Command Reference Table 7-40 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc) Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-16)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu.

Add depth command to end of script wait .0. The Alteon OS 22. You need to specify the protocol (TCP or UDP). nsend <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the packet generated by the bsend command.Add binary send command to end of script nsend .Add binary expect command to end of script nexpect . hex string (UDP)> Sends an ASCII request string through an open TCP or UDP port to the server. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 423 .Add open command to end of script send .Add additional expect binary string to end of script offset .Add close command to end of script (TCP only) rem .Add wait command to end of script close . the users can define their own health checks of varied complexity. With these health checks.Add send command to end of script bsend . So both TCP and UDP services can be health-checked. The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script.Add additional send binary string to end of script expect . [Health Script 1 Menu] open . bsend <hex string> Sends a binary request string in hexadecimal format for the request packet through an open TCP or UDP port to the server. send <text string (TCP). Up to 32 scripts can be configured.0. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.Remove last command from script del . Using one or more nsend commands allows you to generate a binary content of more than 256 bytes in length.Add expect command to end of script bexpect .2 Command Reference / c f g / s l b / a d v h c / s c r i p t <health script number> Scriptable Health Checks Configuration Scriptable health checks provide a robust and extensible way to health check a group of real servers.Add offset command to end of script depth .Display current script configuration Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> <tcp|udp> Opens a TCP connection or specifies a UDP port for the health check.2 allows a maximum of 256 bytes to be entered. The ASCII and binary-based scripts control how a group of real servers are healthchecked.” The total number of characters cannot exceed 6144 bytes. and the port number.Delete script cur .

January 2005 . nexpect <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the original content of the response packet specified by the bexpect command. hex string (UDP)> Allows you to configure an ASCII request string that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. depth <depth. otherwise the health check fails. wait <wait window in milliseconds (1-65535)> Allows the user to configure a wait window for the expected response. The wait window starts when the request is sent from the switch. del Deletes the current script. or beginning from offset if offset was specified. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the depth (the window) in bytes beginning from the start of the UDP data area. If you need to specify offset. the health check passes.2 Command Reference Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage expect <text string (TCP).Alteon OS 22. you must do it after executing the bexpect command.0. cur Lists the current script configuration. to search for the bexpect content. If the expected response is received within the wait window. The wait command should follow the offset and depth commands in the script. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the offset from the beginning of the UDP data area to start matching the content specified in the expect command. 424 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. offset <offset. bexpect <hex string> Allows you to configure binary content request string (in hexadecimal format) that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. The wait window is set in the units of milli-seconds. rem Removes the last entered line from the script. close Closes TCP connection. the server does not pass the expect step and the health check fails. If you do not see this string in any response packet before the health check interval or the configured wait window expires.

1.2.1.1.5.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc SNMP Health Check Configuration [SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid . weight disable|enable When enabled. comm <community string. such as.Delete SNMP health check cur .4.1872. cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration.3. del Deletes the current SNMP health check. invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value.6. When the invert option is enabled. the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response. 1.0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet. an OID is of the form 1. for example. 315393-J. maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet.2.Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt .3.Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight .Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert .1.11.7. rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server. The default community string is public. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 425 .OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm .Display current SNMP health check configuration Table 7-42 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier.Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del .6.1.1. the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field.0.

WTLS+WSP. and the switch verifies the expected response.Display current WAP health check configuration Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu.WTLS port number to health check couple . For further details. see page 428. ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203.WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport . Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation. deployed on WAP gateways/ servers. wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu. The default port number is 9201. WTP+WSP. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check.0. refer to the Application Guide. wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed.Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur .WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt .Alteon OS 22. Alteon OS allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP. [WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt . in a manner similar to scriptable health checks. WTLS+WTP+WSP). 426 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. see page 429. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc WAP Health Check Configuration Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways.WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt . WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented. To view menu options. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol. The default port number is 9200.WTP port number to health check wtlswsp . Alteon OS provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways. To view menu options.WSP port number to health check wtpport .

315393-J. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration. WTLS+WSP. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP. WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service. If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails. WTP+WSP.2 Command Reference Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed. then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled.0.Alteon OS 22. The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 427 . The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202.

An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway.Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur . This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. 428 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt . January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt WSP Content Health Check [WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset .Alteon OS 22. rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway.Display current WSP health check content configuration Table 7-44 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages.Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt .

Offset in received WSP PDU connect .0. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway.GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt . at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content. 315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic. [WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset .REPLY PDU to be received from cur .CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt . This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 429 .Alteon OS 22.Display current WTP+WSP health WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration Table 7-45 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets. rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message. The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU. connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet.

Remove port or VLAN from Proxy IP address cur . cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration. rem <<PIP ID> <port#|vlan#>|<port#-port#|vlan#-vlan#>> Allows you to remove a port or a VLAN from a proxy IP address. January 2005 .Add port or VLAN to Proxy IP address rem . whether it is port-based or VLAN-based.Set base type of Proxy IP address add .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu You need to enable proxy IP address processing on the port to use this command. add <IP address> <port number|vlan number>|<port number-port number|vlan number-vlan number> Allows you to add either a port or a VLAN to a proxy IP address. This command also allows you to remove all ports or VLANs assigned to any proxy IP address. You can configure up to 32 proxy IP addresses on per port or per VLAN basis. You can configure multiple proxy IP addresses based on either port or VLAN.Alteon OS 22. [Proxy IP Address Menu] type .Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-46 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage type <port|vlan> Defines the base type of the proxy IP address.0. 430 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. [Peer Proxy IP Address Menu] add . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 431 . using Layer 2. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch. 315393-J. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch.Rem peer Proxy IP address cur .Alteon OS 22. rem <IP address> Allows you to remove a proxy IP address from the server load balancing peer.Display current peer Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-47 Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Options (/cfg/slb/peerpip) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> Allows you to add a proxy IP address to the server load balancing peer.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/peerpip SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu When this command is enabled. cur Displays the current proxy address configuration of the peer.0.Add peer Proxy IP address rem .

January 2005 .2 Command Reference 432 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22.

but do not alter permanent switch configurations. Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Alteon AD4 and Alteon 184 WebSwitches.Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm .Operational Port Menu slb . with the understanding that when the switch is reset.CHAPTER 8 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately.Clear syslog messages ntpreq . 315393-J. For example.Send NTP request The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. /oper Operations Menu [Operations Menu] port . January 2005 433 .Operational IP Menu swkey . the port returns to its normally configured operation. you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change).Enter software feature to be removed passwd .Enter key to enable software feature rmkey .Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp .Operational Bandwidth Management Menu ip .Change current user password clrlog .

Alteon OS 22. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. passwd <15 char max> Allows the user to change the password. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu. see page 436. January 2005 . To view menu options. slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. which has one sub-menu/option. see page 441. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Sets key to enable software feature.0. see page 439. see page 442. For details. see page 439. For details. 434 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server. see page 439. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Defines software feature to be removed. To view menu options. To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. You need to enter the current password in use for validation. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. see page 435. To view menu options. To view menu options.

315393-J. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. ena Temporarily enables the port.Enable port dis . January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 435 .0. cur Displays the current settings for the port.2 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options [Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon . and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port.Disable port cur .Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port.Alteon OS 22. dis Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.Enable/Disable RMON for port ena .

Enable real server dis . January 2005 .0. To view menu options. sync Synchronizes the SLB. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. 436 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. VRRP and other configurations on peers ena . peers must be configured on the Alteon Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical.Clear session table cur . and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address). filter. To take effect. To view menu options. port. VRRP.Current layer 4 operational state When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled. ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server.Global SLB Operations Menu sync . see page 437.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options [Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] group . Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the Real Server Group Menu. the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches. see page 438.Disable real server clear . Bandwidth Management configuration.Real Server Group Menu gslb . gslb Displays Global SLB Operations Menu.Synchronize SLB.

0. NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server.Current server group operational state Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena <real server number (1-1023)> Enables real server in this group.0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1. NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions. 315393-J. cur Displays the current SLB operational state. 1-1023> [P . dis <real server number (1-1023)> Disables real server in this group. cur Displays current operational state of the server group.Enable real server in this group dis .allow persistent http 1. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 437 .0.Disable real server in this group cur . clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately. see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number.2 Application Guide. /oper/slb/group Real Server Group Operations [Real server group 1 Menu] ena .0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset.Alteon OS 22. For more information.

Query Global SLB selection Table 8-5 Global SLB Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage query Allows you to query the Global site selection.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /oper/slb/gslb Global SLB Operations Menu [Global SLB Operations Menu] query . 438 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.0. January 2005 .

315393-J. the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest).Send BW History to SMTP server Table 8-7 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist) Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 279). [VRRP Operations Menu] back .Alteon OS 22.0. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. When this command is executed.Set virtual router to backup Table 8-6 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-256)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled. After the new election. There are no other virtual routers available to take master control. /oper/bwm Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options [Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist .2 Command Reference /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 439 .

2 Command Reference /oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options [IP Operations Menu] bgp . cur Displays the current BGP operational state. /oper/ip/bgp Operations-Level BGP Options [Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state Table 8-9 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session. 440 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22. To view the menu options see page 440. January 2005 . stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session.Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu Table 8-8 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu.

Once you have your License Password. At the Operations# prompt. Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password.Alteon OS 22. enter: Operations# swkey 315393-J. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1.0. NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate. enter: Main# oper 3. At the Main# prompt. 2.2 Command Reference /oper/swkey Activating Optional Software The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. Before you can activate optional software. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 441 . Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key. you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Alteon OS switch that will run the optional software. “The Command Line Interface”). One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used. you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller. perform the following actions: 1. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased.

enter your 16-digit software key code. Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time. Software feature enabled. For example: Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as. 123456789ABCDEF)> If the correct code is entered.Alteon OS 22. you will see the following message: Valid software key entered. For example: Enter Software Feature to be removed:[GSLB]||BWM|Security: GSLB 442 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. enter the code for software to be removed. When prompted.0. /oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software. To deactivate optional software. January 2005 . enter the following at the Operations Menu: Operations# rmkey When prompted.2 Command Reference 4.

315393-J. The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] .Download new software image via TFTP .Select software image to use on next boot .Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.CHAPTER 9 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.Upload selected software image via TFTP .Select config block to use on next boot .Scheduled Switch Reset Menu . January 2005 443 .

A version of the image ships with the switch.Alteon OS 22. you can upgrade the software running on your switch.Set switch reset time cancel . if needed. and comes pre-installed on the device. Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset Downloading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images. As new versions of the image are released. or boot. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. When you download new software. if your active image is currently loaded into image1. You can set the reboot time.2 Command Reference Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. called image1 and image2. cancel a previously scheduled reboot. 444 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. as well as boot software. For example. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1). This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours. called boot.Display current switch reset schedule Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the Alteon Application Switch. January 2005 . image2. you would probably load the new image software into image2. and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu: /boot/sched Scheduled Reboot Menu [Boot Schedule Menu] set .0.Cancel pending switch reset cur .

This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands. Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. as described below. 315393-J. The system prompts you to confirm your request. You should next select a software image to run. Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. you will need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server.2 Command Reference To download a new software to your switch. 1. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 445 . enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. When the above requirements are met. However. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.Alteon OS 22. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. 5. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331). note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands.0. At the Boot Options# prompt. However. the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot).

and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset. enter: Boot Options# ptimg 2. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]: Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server.Alteon OS 22. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. At the Boot Options# prompt. The system prompts you for information.0. enter: Boot Options# image 2. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. 1.2 Command Reference Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server: Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. 1. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server: Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> 446 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. Enter the desired image: Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file- name> 3. January 2005 . At the Boot Options# prompt.

1. your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. There is also a factory configuration block.0.1.1. you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. enter Y. Under certain circumstances. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]: 315393-J. enter: Boot Options# conf 2. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 447 . To have the file uploaded. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. image2 currently contains Software Version 20. it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default.7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered.2 Command Reference 5. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the Alteon Application Switch. When you perform the save command. This can be useful when a custom-configured Alteon Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1. At the Boot Options# prompt.0. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Alteon Application Switch was manufactured.Alteon OS 22.2. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block.

NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart. at the Boot Options# prompt. enter: >> Boot Options# reset You are prompted to confirm your request. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.0. 448 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. This process can be lengthy. depending on the topology of your network. To reset the switch.2 Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur.

Debugging Menu uudmp .List FLASH dump panic .IP Route Manipulation Menu debug .CHAPTER 10 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information.Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp .Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp . January 2005 449 .tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server cldmp . /maint Maintenance Menu NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu. The panic option.Tech support dump Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: The switch administrator forces a switch panic. [Maintenance Menu] sys .Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu arp . It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting. 315393-J.System Maintenance Menu fdb . The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->. found in the Maintenance Menu. causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory. The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port.Clear FLASH dump lsdmp . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route . and then causes the switch to reboot.

For details. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. For details. see page 457. For details. tsdmp Dumps all Alteon Application Switch information. see page 452. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. see page 456. and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes.2 Command Reference The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. see page 457. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information via TFTP. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. see page 456. see page 454.0. and configuration. lsdmp Displays list flash dump. To view menu options. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. statistics. To view menu options.You can log the tsdump output into a file. 450 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. see page 455. January 2005 . see page 451. For details. The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. see page 451.

Set NVRAM flag word Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys) Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group. [System Maintenance Menu] flags .Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump . The options are used to perform system debugging.Delete an FDB entry clear . 315393-J.0.Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt .Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan .Show FDB entries for a single port trunk .2 Command Reference /maint/sys System Maintenance Options This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group. January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 451 .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database.Alteon OS 22.Show all FDB entries del . /maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options [FDB Manipulation Menu] find .

0.Show ARP address list 452 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. For details.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt .Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . Use “0” for unknown port number. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.2 Command Reference Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.Show all ARP entries clear . /maint/arp ARP Cache Options [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Clear ARP cache addr . January 2005 . Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456).Alteon OS 22. trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group. port <port number. see page 79. 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port.

--------------47. See page 453 for a sample output.169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch.16. 315393-J.81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47. dump).4.----.2 Command Reference Table 10-4 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.80. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port. 192. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 93. /maint/arp/port <port number> ARP Entries on a Single Port IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------. refpt.17. dump Shows all ARP entries. port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port.----.16.80. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.---.----------------.80.17.Alteon OS 22. port.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 453 . vlan. or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.0.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/route IP Route Manipulation
[IP Routing Menu] find - Show a single route by destination IP address gw - Show routes to a single gateway type - Show routes of a single type tag - Show routes of a single tag if - Show routes on a single interface dump - Show all routes clear - Clear route table

Table 10-5 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address. gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-19 on page 92 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-20 on page 93 if <interface number (1-256)> Shows routes on a single interface. dump Shows all routes. clear Clears the route table from switch memory.

NOTE – To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 92.

454

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/debug Debugging Options
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf - Show MP trace buffer sptb - Show SP trace buffer spall - Show All SPs trace buffers clrcfg - Clear all flash configs vmasp - Show designated SP for IP address

The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. Table 10-6 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header. spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008. The buffer information is displayed after the header. Displays all SP trace buffers. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. vmasp <IP address> Displays the assigned SP (Switch Processor) for this IP address.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

455

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmp command will cause approximately 23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. Using the uudmp command, dump information can be read multiple times. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more information on clearing the dump region, see page 457. To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# uudmp

The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following appears:
No FLASH dump available.

/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> TFTP System Dump Put
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. To save dump information via TFTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename> [-mgmt| -data]

Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.
456 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp

The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.

If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.

/maint/panic Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:

Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y

The following messages are displayed:
Loading Image:.......... Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC. Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003: Version 20.2.7 from FLASH image1, active config block. Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password:

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

457

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.

458

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

APPENDIX A

Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT, LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp <Message>: The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server, or ssh.

LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”
ntp: ntp cannot contact primary NTP server <ip_address> cannot contact secondary NTP server <ip_address>

315393-J, January 2005

459

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ALERT
stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per second hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes

460

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT

LOG_ERR
mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “<““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports

315393-J, January 2005

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

461

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port

port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address

462

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

0. ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does” Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual server to support FTP parsing Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural server <server_id> to support URL parsing Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id> Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id> cannot map the same real port or balance UDP Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 463 .2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3 configuration Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and group <group_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id> RS <server_id> can't exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port> Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id> Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist “With VMA.

2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL based redirection “Two services have same hostname. Web server must be moved from TCP port 80” Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address domain name must be configured 464 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J. January 2005 . <host_name>.<domain_name>” Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id> NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id> Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured “For Global SLB.Alteon OS 22.0.

<domain_name>” Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching intrval input value must be in the range [0-24] unapplied changes reverted unsaved changes reverted Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX 315393-J.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address duplicate default entry BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id> BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to ICMP “Two services have same hostname.Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 465 . <host_name>.

Alteon OS 22.peer:%s config:%s Sync Password Failed-Bad Password Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive 466 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout . Try later” new configuration did not validate (rc = ) new configuration did not apply (rc = ) new configuration did not save (rc = ) Sync config apply error Restoring Current Config Sync rx tcp open error Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line Sync Version Failed . January 2005 .0.Resuming Console thread “<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user.

January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 467 .Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE system: system: system: system: system: system: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: internal power supply ok redundant power supply present and ok temperature ok fan ok rebooted <last_reset_information> rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in boot config block changed boot image changed switch reset from CLI syslog host changed to <ip_address> syslog host changed to this host second syslog host changed to <ip_address> second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block user password changed SLB operator password changed L4 operator password changed operator password changed SLB administrator password changed L4 administrator password changed administrator password changed scp <login_level> login “scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">” RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE <login_level> login on Console 315393-J.

2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE (Continued) mgmt: mgmt: “<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console” PANIC command from CLI port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">” vlan: mgmt: mgmt: IP IP vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: Default VLAN can not be deleted <login_level> login from host <ip_address> “<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from” “default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">” default gateway <ip_address> operational virtual router <ip_address> is now master virtual router <ip_address> is now backup “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>” “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group group_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” real server <ip_address> operational real service <ip_address:real_port> operational No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address> 468 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

0. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 469 .Alteon OS 22." server key autogen starts server key autogen completes server key autogen timer timeouts new synch configuration applied new synch configuration saved Synchronizing from <host_name> Synchronizing to <host_name> Config Synchronization Transmit Successful Config Synchronization Receive Successful new configuration VALIDATED 315393-J.2 Command Reference LOG_INFO SYSTEM: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: ssh: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: bootp response from <ip_address> new configuration applied new configuration saved unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes "<image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>. file <file_name> <software_version>" serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name> scp <login_level> login "scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">" <login_level> login on Console "<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console" <login_level> login from host <ip_address> "<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH.

0.2 Command Reference 470 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

UDP.mib aosTrap. Up to 16 IP addresses can be configured in targetAddr table.SynOptics Registration MIB s5tcs112. SNMP Groups) RFC 1573 .mib -.mib aosSwitch.MIB II Extension (IFX table) RFC 1643 .Textual Convention MIB s5emt104.SynOptics Root MIB s5roo117.mib aosPhysical. TCP. Alarm. Version 3 supports two authentication protocols: MD5 and SHA. Address Translation.mib -. IP. and Version 3. Version 2. Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs: RFC 1213 .mib aosLayer7.Ethernet Multi segment Autotopology MIB SNMPv1|v2|v3 traps can be sent to the hosts configured in targetAddr table.RMON MIB (Statistics.mib aosNetwork. History.mib aosLayer4. Alteon MIBs are registered as Vendor 1872. ICMP.MIB II (System.mib In addition. Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent can be found in the following enterprise MIB documents: altroot. Event Groups) RFC 1850 for OSPF 471 315393-J.Bridge MIB RFC 1757 . Interface.APPENDIX B Alteon OS SNMP Agent The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1.EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 .mib aosBwm. the following SynOptics MIBS are also supported: synro193.mib -.mib -. January 2005 .

Community MIB Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215: ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493: NewRoot TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS: Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSwSlbRealServerUp altSwSlbRealServerDown altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached Signifies that the default gateway is alive. Signifies that the default gateway is down.Alteon OS 22.USM MIB RFC 2575 .SNMP Frame work RFC 2572 . Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service Signifies that the real server is up and operational Signifies that the real server is down and out of service Signifies that the real server has reached maximum connections 472 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J.2 Command Reference RFC 1657 for BGP IEEE 802.Target MIB RFC 2574 .MPD MIB RFC 2573 .0. January 2005 .VACM MIB RFC 2576 .3ad MIB for LACP The following SNMPv3 MIBs are supported: RFC 2571 .

January 2005 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 473 . An altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits. An altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold. altSwTempExceedThreshold 315393-J.0. A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router's authentication key or authentication type. The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Backup' state. Implementation of this trap is optional. altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure altSwSlbSynAttack altSwTcpHoldDown An altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack has been detected.Alteon OS 22. An altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination.2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow altSwfltFilterFired altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to availablity of the primary real server Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is available Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is overflowed Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is out from overflow situation Signifies that the packet received on a switch port matches the filter rule Signifies that the service port of the real server is up and operational Signifies that the service port of the real server is down and out of service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Master' state.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description An altSwSlbSessAttack trap signifies that an SLB attack has been detected. An altSwFanFailure trap signifies that a fan failure has occured. altSwSlbSessAttack altSwFanFailure 474 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J.0.

connect the Console port of an Alteon Application Switch to the serial port of your PC that supports XModem/1K XModem. Start hyper terminal (part of Microsoft Windows) and set the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None 3. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 315393-J. This procedure requires the following: A computer running terminal emulation software A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics) A binary switch firmware image (not the tftp file used for TFTP download) Use the following procedure to perform a serial upgrade. Power on the switch.2. 1. 4.PPCBoot 2.APPENDIX C Performing a Serial Download You can perform a serial download of the new Alteon Application Switch software if you are upgrading Alteon OS directly from any image. Using the serial cable. 2. January 2005 475 . Hold the <Shift> key down and hit D repeatedly until the following message appears: Alteon Application Switch .

you will see: CCCC.. When the Console Port is successfully communicating with the PC. Press <Enter> on the key board of the PC that is connected to the console port of the switch. ################################################################# Change your baudrate to 9600 bps and power cycle the switch ! 476 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 315393-J.0. wait for a few seconds and power the switch on. Select <Transfer-Send File> and choose the following: file: For example.2 Command Reference 5. Make sure that the new binary firmware file is available on the computer. 6. This file can be downloaded from the CD that is shipped with the switch..img" (Or the file previously downloaded to the computer) 7.0. otherwise. XMODEM will work too if you choose not to use 1K MODEM. Reconfigure your terminal emulation software with the following parameters (only after you see the message displayed in step 4): Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 115200 8 None 1 None NOTE – You can perform serial downloads at 57600 baud rate by pressing Shift f or at 115200 baud rate by pressing Shift d.Alteon OS 22. The switch will boot with the new software load. protocol: 1K XMODEM It will take about 15 minutes for the transfer to complete.. Do *NOT* power cycle the switch Updating flash. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total bytes transferred: 0x4ff400 Extracting images. Power off the switch. You should see the following sample log on your screen: Alteon Application Switch .. CAUTION—Do not power off the switch until you see the message: “Change your baud rate to 9600 bps and power cycle switch”.. the switch will be inoperable. "21. 8. 9.0_Serial.2..PPCBoot 2.0. NOTE – Although slower. January 2005 .

Virtual server-based load balancing uses half NAT by design. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. A higher number will win out for master designation.) A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address. OSPF. In general. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example. The destination port (application socket: for example. http-80/https-443/DNS-53) Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address. TCP. or a filter. Preemption Priority Proto (Protocol) Real Server Group 315393-J. No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated. UDP. and so on. In VRRP. Default is 100. January 2005 477 . the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). In VRRP. ICMP. because it translates the destination IP address from the Virtual Server IP address. The protocol of a frame. half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another. to that of one of the real servers.Glossary DIP (Destination IP Address) Dport (Destination Port) NAT (Network Address Translation) The destination IP address of a frame. preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority. network address translation can be said to have taken place.

Deny. The action on a filter can be Allow. Therefore. RIP (Real Server) SIP (Source IP Address) SPort (Source Port) Tracking The source port (application socket: for example. VIP (Virtual Server IP Address) VIR (Virtual Interface Router) 478 Glossary 315393-J. Protocol. SPort/Range or DPort/Range. Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration. DIP/Range (via netmask). the destination IP address is not translated to that of one of the real servers.Alteon OS 22. requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to a server group. client or server designation (increments priority by 2 for each reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server) hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10 for each) An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests (like HTTP) to other servers. a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation (with preemption enabled). Real Server IP Address. With this type of load balancing. “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns. An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). Instead. January 2005 . Redirect to a Server Group. or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP address). In redirection-based load balancing. This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it.2 Command Reference Redirection or Filter-Based Load Balancing A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing. redirection-based load balancing is designed to load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall. In VRRP. HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53). or transparent Web cache. spam filter. A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers. a filter is configured in the switch. Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask). The source IP address of a frame. You can track the following: Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each) Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch (increments priority by 2 for each) Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each) l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports.0.

forcing the packet up to Layer 3. updates the relevant checksums. one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224.0. The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}.2 Command Reference Virtual Router A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP. as requests come and go. a server would receive the frame that was destined for it's MAC address. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. Virtual Server Load Balancing VRID (Virtual Router Identifier) VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) VSR (Virtual Server Router) 315393-J. VSR is Alteon WebSystems’ proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. refer to RFC 2338. If there is more than one VLAN defined on the Alteon Application Switch. Classic load balancing. a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. The switch then replaces the VIP and with one of the real server IP addresses (RIP's). and the ARP tables in the devices around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC addresses. the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. All IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch must be in a VLAN.0.0. as defined in RFC 2338. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts. Should the master stop advertising. then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). by the switch. If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing. are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated with the VIP. as well as IP interfaces. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses.Alteon OS 22. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. and advertisements. which is owned by the switch. then the VRID number needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with. If the frames were not half NAT'ed to the address of one of the RIPs. The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP. This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address. Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP. Network address translation is done back and forth. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts. If they didn’t.18. January 2005 Glossary 479 . since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the server (RIP). the two switches would fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address. With VRRP. The server would then drop the frame. In VRRP. and forwards the frame to the server for which it is now destined. The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available. For a more detailed description.

0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference 480 Glossary 315393-J. January 2005 .

........................................................ 354 active switch.......................... 312 autonomous system filter path action .................. 20 autoconfiguration duplex mode .. January 2005 .... 24............ 279 contracts ... 32 link.......................................... 386 filter states................... 453 IP route tag ............................ 358 within real server groups .............................. 447 active FTP SLB parsing statistics ...................................................................................................... 52 access control system ............. 230.................................................. 229 ASCII terminal ..................................... 268........................................... 344 active switch configuration gtcfg ....................... 86 application redirection .............................. 27 B backup SLB real server group option ........................... 93 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) address list ..................................................... 422 (SLB real server group option) content ............................................................................................................. 441 active configuration block ................................... 364 apply (global command) ........................ 17 admpw (system option) . 354 add SLB port option ... 229 applying configuration changes ....... 259 action (SLB filtering option) ............................................................... 49 [ ].. 188 active IP interface ....... 262 advertisement of virtual IP addresses ........................................................ 111 filters ..... 33 port speed........................... 291 STP information ............. 365 / command ................................................................ 230................................... 314 aging STP bridge option ................... 272......... 32 enable/disable on port ................ 365 backup configuration block ............................................................ 234......................................... 359.................................. 400 addr ARP entries.................. 312 aspath ..................................................... 475 3000 series....... 32...................... 282 bandwidth management contract configuration ............................................................................. 312 as .......................... 33 autonomous system filter action .......... 173............................................. 195 bandwidth management configuration ................................................................. 32 auto-negotiation ............... 344 active port VLAN ................... 386 activating optional software .................... 447 backup server activations (SLB statistics) .................... 312 Numerics 1K XModem .......................................................... 274..........Index Symbols (MD5) .... 453 administrator account ......................... 276 setup................. saving and loading configuration .............. 280 bandwidth management contract precedence value .................................................................................................. 269 A abbreviating commands (CLI) ................................................ 354 ptcfg .......................................................................................... 354 restoring .. 32........... 344 active Layer 4 processing ........... 281 481 315393-J..............................................................................................................................................................

..... 203 port .. 476 BBI ............................ See Bridge Protocol Data Unit...................................................................................................324 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options ...............324 in route ............................................................................20 serial download ..................................................327 peer ........................................... 49 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ............ 52 482 Index 315393-J.... 194 binding table .......................... 49 shortcuts .................290 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters .............................................................................. 93 IP route type ......327 binary ....................................... 19 to 25.......................................93 keep-alive time ................................................................................................................................... 292 clear ARP entries ..............................289 bridge priority ............2 Command Reference Bandwidth Management options operations-level options ........................................................................324 eBGP ............................... border router ............328 remote autonomous system .......................................................................................................475....................................19 BGP configuration.................................................476 binding failure ...................................290 broadcast IP route tag .........21 setup (enable/disable) ... 457 FDB entry ........................................................................232 bootstrap protocol ............................ 52 tab completion .475 binary firmware image ..................................443 BOOTP .....................................................................440 BPDU............................................ 92 broadcast domains ..........................................................332 Border Gateway Protocol .......................................... 297 broadcast IP address ...........................................Alteon OS 22................284 buffer limit .377 BLOCKING (port state).............. 52 stacking .............................................................30 system option .................................................................................................................................327 IP address........................................................................................86 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) ... 36 Browser-Based Interface .....................285 bandwidth management statistics ........ for STP .................198 banner (system option)........285 reserve limit ...............327 router hops.....................284 underlimit TOS ...................................0................................................................................................................................325 peer configuration ........284 over the limit TOS ....................86 boot options menu ..........326 redistribution configuration .......... 453 dump information ......93 configuration........ 17 global commands ............ 19 BWM contract rate statistics..........439 bandwidth management policy configuration ........................ 47 commands abbreviations .285 hard bandwidth limit ............... 199 C capture dump information to a file...86 STP transmission frequency .................................................. 399 command (help) ..................................................................... 454 clearing SLB statistics ... 196 client traffic processing .................................................... 452 routing table ...........324 iBGP.................... January 2005 ......................................232 baud rate console connection ................ 200 history statistics .................................172........................................................ 201 contract statistics...................... bridge parameter menu................................................................ 456 Cisco Ether Channel ......... 199 switch processor rate contract statistics .. 27.............................................................................................. 52 conventions used in this manual ..284 soft bandwidth limit .............................................................................................................................................................326 IP route tag ...................................... 199 switch processor contract statistics .......

...... 266............. 276 Gigabit Ethernet ........................................ 95 diff (global) command........................................ 272.............. 302 default gateway IP address ....................... 306 DISABLED (port state) ............. 86 STP port option........ 172.................... 449 default gateway information ............................. 243 current bindings ...................... 86 disconnect idle timeout ...... 387 DNS statistics . 353 switch IP address ................. 262 apply changes ......................................................... 229 VLAN default (PVID) .. 402 dmask destination mask for filtering ................... January 2005 Index 483 ....... 21 connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ........... 268......... 302 dump command ....................................................... 306 save changes ..... for health checks ..0............... 266 flow control ......... 447 factory ........... 270.............Alteon OS 22.............................................................................. 20 serial download settings .................................. 444 dropped frames (No Server Available) counter .............................................. 195 designated port............................................. 194 D date setup................ 457 315393-J......... 229 setup ............................... 313 connecting via console ................... 20 via Telnet............................................................................................ .... for health checks............. 280 copper ports ......... 292 counters............... 271........ 92 directed broadcasts...... 20 connecting ................................. 475................. 211 CPU utilization ......................... 272 IP static route .............. 274....... 232 daylight savings time .......................................................... 273..................................................2 Command Reference configuration administrator password ........................ 209..................................................... 353 maintenance .................................................... 270........................................... 271................................................ 227 configuring routing information protocol ................................. 240.......... 275 VRRP ... bandwidth management ....... 347 round robin....... 333 configuration block active . 447 selection ......................................................................... 229 default gateway interval...................................... 262 operating mode . 301 VLAN tagging .................. 270 cost STP information .... 368 downloading software ........................................... 173.................................. 209...................... 353 setup command ....................................................... 387 direct (IP route type) ..................... 452 deny (filtering) ......... 365 contracts..................................................... 211 cur (system option) ....................... 447 backup............................ 261 view changes.............................. 240 user password ......................... viewing changes .................................................................................... 304 Layer 4 administrator password ................................ 30 system option .............................. 377 console port communication settings ....... 268.................... 195 CPU statistics ...................................................... 276 port link speed . 271............. 353 effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol ................................... 447 configuration menu ...................................................... 266........................... 449 state information .................................................................................... 268............. 275 VLAN IP interface ...................................................................... No Server Available (dropped frames) . 347 default password .............................. 229 Fast Ethernet ................................... load balancing for ................................ 24 delete FDB entry .................................................................................... 292 route cache........ 25 Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) setting update interval ..................................... 160 Domain Name System (DNS) health checks ....... 90 interval........ 173............... 276 port mirroring ............... 267......................................................... 278 port trunking ...... 476 content SLB real server group option ............................................... 195 dump configuration command ................................. 301 TACACS+ ................................................ 243 debugging .................................. 229 dip (destination IP address for filtering) ......... 302 metrics .. 270....................................

..................... 28 Fast Ethernet Physical Link .. See Hot Standby Router Protocol..................................................266 Fast Ethernet.............32 fwd (STP bridge option) ...........86 H half-duplex ...... 272 global commands......................... number of failed health checks ................................................................. 276 setup .... 242 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) ..........................................272 File Transfer Protocol .......................................79........... 49 host routes ............93 flag field.32.......... 19 hprompt system option ... 270....447 factory default configuration ..................25................................. 177 global SLB statistics ................................................. 86 help .............................. 270........................... 266........ 49 global SLB maintenance statistics ............................... 370 health check types............. 360 default gateway interval................................ 86............ 272 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ......................................................32 link status ......181 filtered (denied) frames ..............................................292 F factory configuration block ........... 271...... 32 hash metric ..............................78 Forwarding Database Menu...452 Forwarding Database Information Menu .... 367 health checks...................... 69...................38 first-time configuration ....................................... 347 Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) priority increment value for L4 client ports ..........417 FDB statistics ................................................................................... 346 use with VRRP ........39 emulation software .................... 346 Hot Standby Router VLAN (HSRV) use with VRRP .................................................................... 110 parameters for most protocols ..........................54............................... 425 WAP ....................32 dynamic routes .............. 338 VRRP priority increment value ........................Alteon OS 22........475 EtherChannel as used with port trunking ........................ 272 Gigabit Ethernet configuration ........... 354 E EMS........... 119 configuring ..................................... 27..............................................................189 full-duplex ..449 delete entry .....................................145 fiber optic ports ........................................................................................0............................................ 232 HSRP. 386 retry.................................. 344 VRRP priority increment value ......................... retries .............. 302 IDSLB................................... 368 redirection (rport) .........................................189 FTP SLB statistics dump ................ 266.............290 FwdDel (forward delay)............................... 242 group ...... 174 grace graceful real server failure .......... 302 script ..........................454 G gig (Port Menu option) ................ 338.................................387 Final Steps.................. 342 HP-OpenView ............................ 180 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ............. 423 SNMP ......... bridge port ...................... 314 Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) use with VLAN-tagged environment ...................................... 426 hello STP information .......................................................................... January 2005 .. 367 layer information ......................................................................................................... SLB . 266............................................................266 fastage ...........451 forwarding state (FWD) ...................... 344 hot-standby failover ........................................................... 27 to 43 fixed IP route tag ....368 FTP SLB maintenance statistics.................. 25......... 417 Greenwich .......306 forwarding database (FDB) .....................................187 filter statistics ...... 484 Index 315393-J.................................... 270.........268...................................................................................................... 33 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ....... configuring ports for .................... 87 FTP server health checks ..........................95 flow control ............. 195 filters IP address ranges .........................173....................................................................Alteon EMS ...... 369.................2 Command Reference duplex mode ............................................................................................................... 119 setup ..................................................54.............. 274...........................................................................................................................

...................................................................................... 119 linkt (SNMP option) ... 416 incorrect VIPs (statistic) . 194 incorrect Vports (dropped frames counter) ..................... 344 layer 7 SLB maintenance statistics ............................................... 344 configuring address ..............0.. 233 logical segment.......... 172............. 368 redirects (Global SLB option) ....... 367..................................... 90 local (IP route type) ................................................................................................................................ See Hot Standby Router Protocol......... 446 IMAP server health checks ................ 441 license password ........... 302 filter ranges .................................. 104 IP interface ................................................... 444 software............................................... 92 Information Trunk Group Information............................................................................... 315393-J................................................. 21 IP address mask for SLB ..... 21 configuring default gateway .................................................. 301 configuring VLANs .......1d Spanning-Tree Protocol ............ 307 log syslog messages ..................Alteon OS 22.............................................. 161 idle timeout overview...........2 Command Reference HSRV... 368 imask (IP address mask) . 35 IP subnets VLANs .......................................................... 119 Link Status Information ...... 85........... 69...... 276 link status..................................... 402 system option ...... 90 IP Information Menu .............................................................................................................................. 367 IEEE standards 802.......... 94 BOOTP ............................... 182 LDAP version .................................... 183 layer7 redirection statistics ....................................................................................................................... 35 local route cache ranges .................................................................................... 90 IP route tag ............................. January 2005 Index 485 ........ 53 Interface change stats .............................. 268............... selecting ..................... 259 http ..... 173.. 246 LISTENING (port state) .............................................................. 259 HTTP health checks on any port (aphttp) .............. 69.......................................................................... See IP subnets.................................. 93 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ........................... HTTP application health checks ........... 297 I ICMP statistics .... 454 IP routing .............. 306 local networks for route caching ............. 24 Layer 4 processing active.......... 416 IP configuration via setup ......................... 92 local network for route caching .................. 90 lnet (routing option) ................................................................................... 35 tag parameters ............................ 271..................... 306 local route cache IP address ranges for........ configuring ... 262 Layer 4 administrator account.. 301 L l4apw (L4 administrator system option) ............................................ 154 interface statistics ......... 346 IP network filter configuration ....................... 387 IP interface ...... 90....................................................................................... 422 LEARNING (port state) ............................................. 54................................................................................................................................ 119 duplex mode .. 155 IP subnet mask .................................................................................................................. 35 ARP information ....................................... 25 IDSLB health checks .......................................... 87 Information Menu .. 92 information .... 163 IP address .................. 304 IP statistics .............. 86 lmask (routing option) ......................................... 330 directed broadcasts .......... 184 layer 7 SLB string statistics .... 301 active .................................. 306 IP forwarding information ...................... 307 Telnet .... 308 IP port configuration . 35...................................................... 330 IP Route Manipulation Menu ..................................................... 441 link speed............................... 86 least connections (SLB Real Server metric) ... 370 licence certificate .. 195 indirect (IP route type) ................ 422 IP interfaces .............................................................................. 35 IP forwarding ..................................................................... 93 IP Static Route Menu .... 54....... 288 image downloading ............................ 54 command ............................................................................................................ 119 port speed........................................

............ 151 global ..................................92 mask IP interface subnet address ................................ multicast IP route type .................................................................................................................................................364 metrics.......320 media access control....................................172.............................................. See MAC address....................455 mmask IP address mask for SLB ....386 network management ........................... 365 MD5 authentication key ...............455 display MAC address ...............367.................................... 271.......... health parameter of a hello packet ............................... 441 removing ............................................... 98......19 non TCP/IP frames ...55....2 Command Reference M MAC (media access control) address........ 179 online help ............. 315 cost of the selected path ..47 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ................................................ 439 operations-level IP options .................. SLB .....................290 O octet counters ..................................... 321 export .......................................................... 317 authentication key .................... 320 configuration ...................................................................... metric SLB real server group option...............................Alteon OS 22.................. 439 optional software ........... 315 ospf area index ........................................ 276 operations menu .. authentication parameter of a hello packet .............................301 MaxAge (STP information) ......................... 440 Operations-Level Port Options .......................... 78...... 451 notice ................. 320 cost value of the host ... N nbr change statistics..................... declaring a silent router to be down ......... 54........206 MP...... 94. 232 NTP synchronization ..........................................................370 minimum misses (SLB real server metric) .......................................48 Maintenance Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 320 dead................................ 292 mxage (STP bridge option) ................................ See Management Processor..................92 multi-links between switches using port trunking... 315........... 322 dead.......................................... 441.............87............ 194 486 Index 315393-J...............316 MD5 cryptographic authentication ..................................................21 Main Menu ............. 442 OSPF area types ........ 127 activating .................... 323 fixed routes ...317 MD5 key .............416 monitor port................................................................... 435 operations-level SLB options .................................0................... 49 operating mode.....................................................153 Network Address Translation (NAT) filter action ........ 243 NTP time zone .............................25 summary ................. 440 operations-level BWM options ................................................................................ January 2005 ............ 370 Miscellaneous Debug Menu .................................................... configuring .86 mcon (maximum connections) ..................................................278 mp packet ................................ 433 operations-level BGP options ............ 242 switch location ............55 manual style conventions ....... 151 hello..........................17 martian IP route tag (filtered) ............... 325 general .......................................... 436 operations-level VRRP options ....... 195....................416 mnet management traffic IP address for SLB .................................................93 IP route type (filtered out) .......................... 268............................449 Management Processor (MP)....173.

........................................... 320 type................................................. 24 user account ........................... 98 OSPF Information Route Codes ............ 315 virtual link configuration .. 317 virtual link ............................................... 93 type........... 54............... 101 OSPF general ........................................... 195 overflow servers ......... 318 stub area ..............................2 Command Reference host entry configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 99 OSPF General Information ............................................................................................... 270 configuring Fast Ethernet ................................................. 323 spf.............................. 377 ping ......................... 24 L4 administrator account .................................. 315 interface configuration ....................... 111 STP port priority ........................................................................ 345 passwords ................. 100 OSPF Information ...................................................... 318 transit area .......... 265 port flow control........ 261 password administrator account ...................... See flow control................................................................................................................................... 317 priority value of the switch interface.................................................................................0........................ 32 port states UNK (unknown) ................................................ 277 information ................. 337 virtual router ....................................... 321 OSPF Database Information ................ 120 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority ................................................................ 292 VLAN ID.................................................................................................... 457 switch (and Maintenance Menu option) ............................................................... 292 prisrv primary radius server ..................................... router ID ....................................................... 319 link state database . 119 port speed .............................. 32 setup....................... 359 PIP .............. January 2005 ... 92 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics ..... 24 default ..................... 88 priority.............................................................................................. 449 parameters tag ................. 320 range number .................................... 90 membership of the VLAN ................ 188 Password user access control ............................. 120 IP status ................................................................................................ shortest path first .......... 31 disabling (temporarily)........................Alteon OS 22................. 79 port trunking description ............................................. 69.................... 342 priority (STP port option) .............. 316 interface .................................................................................................... 270........ 24 VRRP authentication ......................... 368 port bandwidth management switch processor statistics switch port contract statistics menu................ Port Menu configuration options ............................. 150 overflow server activations ....................................................................... 86 RJ-45.... 278 Port number ...... 315 redistribution menu ............. 78.................. 316 MD5 authentication key.......... 314 POP3 server health checks... 336. 272 port mirroring configuration ................. 316 Not-So-Stubby Area ........ 266 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) ....... 102 OSPF statistics . 316 route redistribution configuration ................ 292 ports configuration ..................... 50................... 119 auto-sense ............................................................ 322 host routes .......................................... 430 poisoned reverse............................................. 198 port configuration ... 54................................. 266...... 265 SLB state information ................ 292 port trunking configuration .............. 173..................................................................................... 342 priority virtual router ...... 23 315393-J............................ 317 transit delay ................................ 317 summary range configuration ........ 321 virtual neighbor........................ 360 321 persistent bindings real server ......................... as used with split horizon ................................... 361 Index 487 199 P panic command ......................... 239 proxies IP address translation ....................................

.....................................................................................449 restarting switch setup ................................................. 152 Q quiet (screen display option) .................................................... 367.... 314 poisoned reverse ...358 real servers backup ............................354 PVID (port VLAN ID)....................50 R RADIUS server authentication ......... 274....................2 Command Reference proxy IP address (PIP) ....179 real server global SLB statistics .........................29 retries radius server ........................................................ 32......442 reset key combination ..............364 real server group statistics .......................................................................................................... See Routing Information Protocol.......................................................... 239 secsrv secondary radius server .............................54...................... 276............. 268.................................................................................430 ptcfg (TFTP save command) .......................................................110 reboot ......361 removing optional software ..180 real server SLB configuration ......................................93 RIP................................................. See IP subnets.... 457 receive flow control 32.................................. 239 Secure Shell ...................................................................... 363 operations-level options .................................................................................................................................................................. 120 pwd ......... 277 redir (SLB filtering option) ..........364 statistics .................. 93 options .. 33 Rx/Tx statistics........................................ 271........................................245 real server statistics ......................................................................... 370 route cache configuration ........................... 157 router hops .................. 313 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ................................................ 314 version 1 parameters....... 314 split horizon ........175 real server group options add ...................386 reference ports ....................180 real server groups combining servers into ................................................................................................................................................346 SLB state information ............................... 229 noback option ..........................302 rip IP route tag .....0.............111 proxy IP address (PIP) configuration .................... 20 serial download ............................95 remote monitoring on the port (rmon) ................. 327 routing information protocol configuration .................................. See IP subnets.............................................365 priority increment value (reals) for VRRP .........239 retry health checks for default gateway ..........................435 remote site servers ...........................................Alteon OS 22...........................................................................366 real server group SLB configuration...79 referenced port .....442 S save (global command) ............................................................... 475 Server Load Balancing IDS ............................................... 436 real server weights .............. 230 save command............... 190 rx flow control . rmkey .................................. 423 secret radius server ..368 read community string (SNMP option) .......... 359 488 Index 315393-J................................. 238 security VLANs.. 33................... 376 RTSP SLB statistics ... 306 route statistics ........... 297 segmentation..... January 2005 ..................................................... serial cable ................... 423 scriptable health checks configuration ........................................................................................................ 313 rport SLB virtual server option ...... 447 script health checks ..... segments........... 347 roundrobin SLB Real Server metric .......................................50 round robin as used in gateway load balancing .......449........

35 IP subnet mask ............... 367 icmp .. 19.................................................................................... 33 port configuration .................................................................... 245 set and get access .............. 35 port auto-negotiation mode ............2 Command Reference server load balancing client traffic processing........................................................... 30 VLAN name ....................................................................................................................... 360 RIP.............. 387 smtp ....................................................... 359 submac .................................................... 33 port speed ............................................................................. 194 315393-J................. 360 intr (interval) .................................................................................................... 29 system date .................................................................................................................................................................................... 270 SIP (source IP address for filtering) ..................... 359 restr (restore) SLB real server UDP option .0..................................... 245 SNMP Agent .................................. 367 imap .......................... 182 SLB real server group health checks arp............................................................................................Alteon OS 22................ 365 metric .......... 27 BOOTP ....................... 387 SLB filtering option action . 360 weights ............................... 30 system time ................ 368 wtls ........... 111 server traffic processing ............................. 368 smtp ........... 417 smask source mask for filtering ........................................ 367 udpdns ............................ 232 SMTP server health checks ............................................................................. 368 script ...................... 30 duplex mode ........................................................... 370 port options ....... 29 Spanning-Tree Protocol ............................................. 356 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics Menu .... 130 health checks ....... 360 maxcon (maximum connections) ........ 31 port flow control ........................ 368 tcp ... 367 ftp ................................................................ 386 SLB Information ............ 365 health checking ............................................................ 32. 187....................... 218 186........................... 369 sslh.............................................. 32 IP configuration ...................... 369 SLB real server group option application health checking ............................................................................ 360 retry .................................................................................................................. 359 name.... 209 SFP GBIC ports ................ 360 session identifier ............................................................ 364 SLB real server option backup ................................... 368 http.................................. 369 radius ............................... 399 health check .................................................................. 28 stopping.................................. 353 setup facility .................... 367 health check types ........................................................................................................................................................................... configuration ............................................................ 52 single-mode ports .............. 359 slowage .. 368 ldap ......................................................... server port mapping ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 34 VLAN port numbers ................................................ 367 SNMP .............. 400 server traffic processing ........... 32.............................................. 455 SNMP ................ 34 VLAN tagging ........................... 425 SNMP health checks ............... 361 tmout (time out) .................... January 2005 Index 489 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 110 SLB layer7 statistics ............................................................................. 25....... 425 HP-OpenView ........ 471 SNMP health check configuration ......................................... 368 snap traces buffer .................................... alias for each real server ..................................................... 373 setup configuration ................................................................... real server IP address .............. 369 SNMP statistics ............................................. 19 menu options . 399 server load balancing configuration options ................................................. 31 starting ...................................................... 368 wsp .............. 353 setup command......... 367 dns .... 34 SFD statistics mp specific ............ 32 restarting .................. 272 shortcuts (CLI) ................... 399 Session Binding Table .................................... 367 metrics ........ 33 VLANs ...................................................

..............................377 secure socket layer statistics ................... 55 location (SNMP option) . current ................................................ 229 bridge aging option ........304 statistics group ............................................Alteon OS 22................................................................................... 259 usrpw (user password) ...........................................290 bridge priority ...........418 490 Index sync ..................................................................35 IP interface ..........................86........................................................................455 swkey ............31 switch reset effect ..........35 subnets ... 232 hprompt .. 233 system contact (SNMP option) ............................................................................314 statis route add ....................... 243 date ............................................. 243 T tab completion (CLI) .... 240.....................29 subnet address maskconfiguration IP subnet address ......................448 Switch Processor (SP).86 state information............................ 259 System Maintenance Menu .......... 451 system options admpw (administrator password) ......291 bridge parameters .................................................................... 413................................................................ 165..205 Statistics Menu ................................186 stacking commands (CLI) .....................52 starting switch setup .................. 445 PUT and GET commands ......................304 static routes Routing Information Protocol (RIP) .....................................301 subnet mask ...................................................................... 21 BOOTP ......... January 2005 ....................................................................87.................................................. 259 l4apw (Layer 4 administrator password) ....................................441 software image .. 353 telnet radius server ............ 208 Telnet ......................... 436 synchronization VRRP switch............................................................ 290 setup (on/off) ....... 262 login banner ...........................314 SSL ................................................. 17 TFTP .......441 SYN attack detection configuration .............................. 245 system access control configuration.................................. 385 TCP statistics ......................................................... 436 syslog system host log configuration ..............................93 static route rem ............. 259 tnport ..129 stopping switch setup.......................................... 53............ 21 configuring switches using .............................0...... 20 text conventions .........................455 display trace buffer ........................ 232 tnet.................................................................................................................................... 232 time...................................................................................................... 240 TACACS+ ..................... 39 terminal emulation .................................. 368 source and destination ports........... 232 cur (current system parameters) .. 240..............................................................................292 port priority option......................... 52 tacacs ........................................ 240 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support ............................................................... 262 BOOTP ......................................... client system....... 240 TCP fragments ............301 switch resetting .................................................55 license ........................................................................................292 root bridge ...... 360 health checks .................................................................... 245 date and time .............................................................448 split horizon.............................................................. 354 TFTP server ................................................................................................................. 354 315393-J....377 static IP route tag ........2 Command Reference SNMP Support optional setup for SNMP support ....................................180 management processor ............................................28 state (STP information) ................................................................................................288 Spanning-Tree Protocol .............................................. 232 HTTP access ................................................................................86 port cost option ......................................... 261 system parameters..................................................................................................... 373 health checking using .......210 spanning tree configuration.............................................................444 SP specific statistics ..............................................39 software image file and version ................................................................................

SLB information about ........ 259 TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol) ............... 346 virtual server global SLB statistics ....... 339 transmit flow control32........................................... 276...................................... 342 virtual router group configuration ........ 360 source and destination ports .. 50 Tracking VRRP ....................0............ 335 priority tracking options . 32.................... 30 system option ........................................................... 261 Uuencode Flash Dump ........ 33 407 tnet system option ................... 297 VLAN tagging port configuration...... authentication ........................... 344 HSRV priority increment value ....................... 270........ 92 typographic conventions............. DNS response (global SLB menu option) V verbose ..................................................... 458 upgrade..............Alteon OS 22............................... 181 VLAN active port .................... 344 priority..... 456 315393-J.................... 344 configuration ............................... 386 Trunk Group Information ........................................................ 275 port restrictions . 338 master preemption (preem) ...... 335........................... 259 tnport system option ............................................................................................................. 277 transparent proxies.... 342 master preemption (prio) ............................................... 345 group options (prio) ... 111 virtual router description ............................................... 344 HSRP priority increment value .................... 33.................... 239 timeouts idle connection ............................................................ 367 SLB state information .............................................. 336 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP .............................................................................. 232 timeout radius server ................... 50 vip advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes ......................................................................... 33 type of area ospf.................................... 337 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration333 virtual router sharing ... January 2005 Index 491 ................................... 154 time-to-live..................... 268... 326.......................................................................2 Command Reference time setup .......................................... 24 usrpw (system option) ................................ 298 setup.... 87 ttl (time to live......................................................... 336..... switch software .............. global SLB menu option) ..................................................... 25 timers kickoff........... 342 virtual routers HSRP failover ............................................................................... 345 priority election for the virtual router ............................................. 343 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces ....................................... 385 UDP statistics . 273. 340 incrementing VRRP instance ................. 274................. 17 tzone ................................... 444 URL for health checks ..................................................... when used for NAT .......... manual ............................................................................................................................................ 111 user account ............................ 167 unknown (UNK) port state .. 347 increasing priority level of ................................................................................................ 455 traceroute... 208 UDP datagrams ............................................................................ 181 virtual servers ........................... 334 master mode ...... 111 virtual port state........................... 341 virtual router group priority tracking ...... 417 trace buffer . 342 tracking criteria ............................................................................................... 111 statistics ............................................................... 338.............. 337 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ............ 317 type parameters . 342 operations-level options ................................ 314 IP route tag ........................... 401 tx flow control............................................... 172........... 79 Unscheduled System Dump . 194 server status using ................... 455 Switch Processor ............... 346 HSRV.................. 175 virtual server SLB statistics ......... 439 password... 93 virtual IP address (VIP) ....... 267................................ 271...................................................... 242 U UCB statistics ..

..88 interface .................................................................426 WAP health check wspport .................. 298 VLAN Number ....346 virtual router sharing ..................................................................................................................... 427 WAP health check configuration .425........425.................................33...........................36 multiple spanning trees ................ 426 wtlsprt WAP health check ........................... 54...........................................................................159 X XModem ..........................35 ARP entry information ...19 weights for SLB real servers ............................................................... 427 492 Index 315393-J..................................0...................266...........................288 tagging .... 339 tracking configuration ............... 88 port numbers .................. 120....................192 watchdog timer ........105 VRRP master advertisements time interval .34 port membership...............................78.336 VRRP Information ......2 Command Reference VLANs .........425.............345 master advertisements ........426 WAP SLB statistics .......297 information ..............................................................................................................................................450 web-based management interface..................... setup . 426 wtlsprt ....................................................297 setting default number (PVID) .................................................... January 2005 ..................78.......................................88 VRID (virtual router ID) ....................................................................346 write community string (SNMP option) ... 88 name setup..Alteon OS 22................34 security ...... 475 275 W WAP health checks .... 272.................................................. 342 VRRP interface configuration ........................................................................................................................34 Spanning-Tree Protocol . 270.335 tracking .................................371 setting virtual router priority values ..........................335......245 wspport WAP health check ......................342 VRRP statistics .............................335..................425.....................................................94 broadcast domains ..........................................................288 name .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful